

















Class _4 2 7 

Rnn V S’ 

CoEyiiglit 1^? Vy-rT' 


CDPHRIGHT DEPOSm 


I • 1 • ' 



'i ' '•'* ■ ^ ., 1 V ; ' . J-- 

■ ( .■•'V 




■ •/• '‘ . 

'•,yV • V 

‘ ' */v ' ' .4 

’ I , ' .V 


SKj 




V/ 






a ' 


’.(''• Vm 


m,' . * » ^ ^ / 

'•-,. .r ;• V ,.• ' . . 

• ■ ' ’i ■^'o .*•’■. ♦ V ' . .T 


t 1 


’ ^ Pr --..: >■ 

iV ;» 'V 

'/•'•>/■ v '- H 

'v V ' '• ■!'(■' 


t /. 



iV'V£ 

( * . J J 
1 - *, 


2 l ?>. 





it " ■'" ' '■ ^ ' '■ ‘ ' "■ ‘-V % 

• v .' l : ■■^ ■'• - f * 


’.^^■ 




. ■•. « O' .' I r-: ' ..'lip 


• ' -.r "t • ’ ^ 

• . % 'T' • ■ 'V-* s • 

'•••'■' ' > r .* 




‘ ''' ' ffl ' ■' 

‘:r ii ' ■;■ ‘ V ',: .. 


V. 

t 


[•^■ i .- ■■* . V , 


a . .. ^ '' . k . ' 


k ^ kbb -^ •« ■ ' 

• - ■ 

■ • ' •, , ,■ 



,. •, ' Vt * k . .w 






/' IfM, 

%,■'■'■,;»•■ ;':;:,.:.V',,' 

•• . 1 * *■ 1 •« • 

' ■ : ' ■ 


>. ;•'■ i 




^ *• 


. \ 


.:• '* r 







' * ' '/ 7*'i *’ * W 

•: '. . v *' - ‘ - 



iM * f : 



S<.'vrA,.:.£®fc, : 



V '■ *. /‘>\ 

'* T ''" T ' 

■ L .— 


■.1 


1 ' 

.hr -M 



. •, , » M _V ., f ',' 





% 


^ V 




\ *• 


'I 




, ' • I 


s 


• t 


I .•• \ • ' V . .•: 

‘k'Hi ti'"., i ' ’ • i.v 


'A) 





' , » 


'.^>k 










t 


t 


s 


r 


4 


r « 

i • 






I • 


Y 


I 



1 


• t 




I 

' I 


p 


V 



* 



4 

9 


I 






i’ 


I 


« 




• I 


« 


# 





4 


I 




I 


« 







t 

• « 





# 

* < 


* 


' ( 



\ 




I 

# 

; r 



« 






I 




t 









I' 


1 

4 ' * 


I 






1 



« •« 




I 


I 


« 


/ 


« 




> 1 


$ t 

T • 

J.. 

I* ’ 

rt‘. 




f 





J 




f 

# 

* 




« 


» 


A j ■ j 



# 




4 






>.w 












^ VI 




t' 




k» »♦ 


V 


Vm(.J 


•WATxv' 


m 


?.-)^vU'' ‘ rl "K :'''V ;- ' . 









v.iy'h 


V 


v-V ■ 




'•>711 


( 


f!M. . 





,Avj':- ■■ 


, 'Vf '* ' 




'•V 

I I ' 




:t. 


^ t 


''X ‘ ' ;• ,: , r.;. 




< t 4 » 



KbiMSy^V4rt''‘^*^ ‘i 'v ''■ •J'n*. " ^ 

HTlIB^f ill' Vifr^' w' ji *' '" ^;i ••',*• ' ,v'i . 

!E&SHWKj3[B4v'<tv • “A • . ‘ v’ 



N « “ 


f ► 4 


, r, ■,^> 


*• 




•s .* • 




-r'^' 


ar/v'' > ^''''■ - ' 

V.y/' '■ 

, « A '4 . . 


I I 




I.i- 


>>^i. * 




p * lv“ 

•.<■/* r.k, 


’-- V.' . 


r>.’' ',' 





f»T# 








‘ I' 


» « 


u 


>.f‘ 





? 

» 




• "I 


' '.f 


iSi^ 


r*f.» 


I . ’I 


'»0 


:tvA 


j ■ •’■*•'■ 










A 




I: l\ ■' " 




I I 






Yr 




-c*’ 


I 


• > 


,/*» 


. » ♦ 


• i: 




i%- 


*■• t 

1 •• 


. r 


*\ rti 




*•: 


>' 




i . '^r. 


-■ r* 


' ^ \ 




r* 


n 




...\ 


•>' , 


f i^ . *. 


•! 






'.' , 'A fj il 

, .' ■'•Vvi . 

• ill ‘A T' • ‘ ■ 

l.ai'.Wt'.V .' .r .' V 




' i 


' ' I 

• ■ 9?f- 


'V .r 




3':. 


it • y\}i ‘ 

V • f 1.1 1 > ■ 


•? 




'^t^i 


*• ' >i:- 

N .• ••f*l 'f 


* • 




r>^ 7^* 

‘ ^ 


' ■’ '■ ' 

;|fc 

, V ' f I J- 



.V 


1‘ 




;;v 


•■ »l ' I 

. ... ,_ 'I • "•■ -U 

:. /. AMT' ^ ■ 




'ij. 


,^/?l 6 .V' ‘ 

• '^V-' 

[• i _ A • , ■ *, 




rM- '•' '^ Vtitt' ‘ ' ■'■ 






WHVk . ..^VvV'.'Y., 

-s- 




' 'i I 


t s . * 


9 

'J'. 


A 


m. 


'" L 


y 'XVP 


IL^ 


• , 1 




MB 




•-V 


' J*>fC 

»i44 




•j ‘A 




> ii 


V 

















, / ,•/ ^ •■” c^A: 










r i 


• A AO 


'* • .1 


'V 


’ ■*. • . V’V • i r *i i.- I. ' 



>^7f: 

• ••o 

i:» ' > 




S«. 


4 ,f .V_'P,i:j; 

'.'.V < 


’' 1^1 '•vy ^ wy 

W • -.I?' •; «m| 












Ti 





' ■ /V^V -m 

'K.: X’> 


y I • ^ / ifc ■* V • ^ 


'v 


.*v » 









’"I'S’ 


V : 


•■’ '.'A' 


♦ V ; ■ 


'_.v; *r^r 


'•■''' .C': 


■ • i3 , . j 



: ■ • .'» ■ 


V . 


/ ' •. ► 





» '• • ' .-•.' »*.«'■• sv ,•'■ ■ .V* 


i « I 




V' 


v.‘ \ 


1 . 





THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 


By ROGER T. FINLAY 

Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and 
an aged Professor who are cast away on an island with 
absolutely nothing but their clothing. By gradual and 
natural stages they succeed in constructing all forms of 
devices used in the mechanical arts and learn the 
scientific theories involved in every walk of life. These 
subjects are all treated in an incident and natural way 
in the progress of events, from the most fundamental 
standpoint without technicalities, and include every 
department of knowledge. Numerous illustrations 
accompany the text. 

Two Thousand things every boy ought to know. Every page 
a romance. Every line a fact 


Six titles — 60 cents 'per volume 


THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
The Castaways 

THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
Exploring the Island 

THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
The Mysteries of the Caverns 

THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
The Tribesmen 

THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
The Capture and Pursuit 

THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 
The Conquest of the Savages 


PUBLISHED BY 


I 


THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 

147 Foubth Avenue New York 


THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS 


THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


V 


' y 


i 



■i, 

' V 


^ ' *- i 

♦ 




f . f 


< 






- « 





. * Ml 


f 



«> t 


/ 

1 


k 


‘ -r -'i. ' ^ ■ ^ 

. ' /dc\vV .«'••>' 


f . -- wm, - . : r 'W' 

‘ "•' ^ **<,#■■ A. 

, • -•'.7 


* A - * 'f , ^ ■ *^ 

-f - . t .' 


>» ■. 





>‘i ^ 

/ ' r '# 

'*kj' ' -’’ 

' ■ ^'** t )l> 

• ■ ‘“r: ’^■' 

. * v’ -•' ^* • y' .t 

,', ■ .. - 0-^ ’ 


♦t » 


- ^ Woi'x •* |•J ^ i ^IM 

" /•’v'CW^ ’ a"*- 

- f* ■ ; * -■ V .. 






'? M 


j ..'i*- ' ‘. • 

/:i > 







‘‘ The professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it 
to George''' 


[See p. 43] 


The Wonder Island Boys 

THE MYSTERIES OF THE 
CAVERNS 


ROGER T. FINLAY 


ILLUSTRATED 




THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 
New York 


TZq 


Copyright, 1914, by 
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 




jyr-5 1914 

x& 

©CI.A8 7(;28 5 




CONTENTS 


I. Mysterious Disappearance of the Team Page 11 

The runaway team. Circumstances leading up to the 
present condition. The singular occurrences. Exam- 
ining the tree. The search for the yaks. Red Angel 
as a scout. On the tracks. Losing the trail. Red 
Angel’s discovery. The wrecked wagon. The lost 
weapons and ammunition. Breaking in new steers. 
The planting program. Different plants and soils. 
Prospecting for ores and vegetation. Discussing hunt- 
ing trip. How people of different countries select 
soils. Wild fruit and vegetables. Lessons from the 
actions of their animals. Propagation of fruit and 
vegetables. Chemical changes produced by different 
soils. The wild potato. 

II. Working on the New Boat Page 22 

Determine to bring in the newly discovered lifeboat, 
Trip to South River. Finding the broken yoke of their 
team. Recovering the lifeboat. Uses for the bolo. 
Decision to row the boat around the point. Making 
more guns. Preparing new tools. Alloys and their 
uses. Hardness of metal. Bronze. Ancient guns. 
Manganese. Making stocks for the guns. Commenc- 
ing the hull of the new boat. Size of the vessel. 
About shape or form of hulls. Momentum. Resistance. 
Red Angel’s attempt to whistle. Amusing perform- 
ance. Teaching Red Angel accomplishments. Vibra- 
tion, the universal force. 


1 


11 


CONTENTS 


III. The Hidden Message Page 36 

The new yoke for the yaks. Some of the mysteries. 
Discussion concerning future discoveries. Rainbows. 
Musical pitch and colors. Reflection and refraction. 
Riding the yaks. Completing some of the guns. The 
trip after the wrecked wagon. Finding their runaway 
team. Accounting for their disappearance. Prospect- 
ing. Sugar cane discovered. Sorghum. The Tama- 
risk. Rigging up the lifeboat with sails. Discovery 
of a hidden message in the lifeboat. Examining the 
place where it was found. Determining the time when 
the message was written. Rushing preparation of guns 
and ammunition. Galena. Lead. Getting rid of the 
sulphur. Making bullets. 

IV. The Terrible Monsoons Page 47 

Completing the guns. Description of the new ones. 
Polishing grit. Emery. Corundum. Laying the keel 
of the big boat. Terrible winds. The monsoons. Trade 
winds. Length of summers north and south of the 
Equator. Disappearance of the flag from Observation 
Hill. George and Angel’s hunt for the flag. Disap- 
pointment. Angel finding the flag. Angel’s laugh. 
Facial expression in animals. Brass. The form of 
bullets. Why pointed at one end and hollow in the 
other. Rifling guns. Spiral movement. Molds for 
castings. The Professor’s desire to fully explore the 
cave. Weaving the sails for the new boat. Angel’s 
work on the loom. 

V. The Voyage for the Benefit of Angel, and the 

Disco\'ery Page 60 

Completing the hull of the new boat. Making manilla 


CONTENTS 


111 


rope. Decide to take Angel along. Enticing him 
aboard. His consternation. Hounding the cliflfs. Dis- 
covering their first boat among debris. Taking it 
along as a trailer. Sailing up Cataract River. Evi- 
dence that their boat had been used by some one. 
Proof of its use by the natives. One of the signs of 
civilization. Leverage. Fulcrum. Mechanical powers. 
Delay of voyage owing to weather. Tourmaline. 
Harry’s invention. The bamboo tubes. Testing how 
fast the guns could be loaded and fired. Cartridges. 
The marine works. The boats. Three cheers for the 
new ship. 


VT. The Gruesome Finds in the Cave Page 71 

The cave. Taking the boat to explore the interior. 
The air pocket. A board for charting the cave. The 
boat on the wagon. Entering the cave. The lights. 
Returning for the boat. The peculiar noise at the cave 
entrance. Methods for searching the cave. The domed 
chamber. Making a circuit within it. The outlet. 
The second chamber. The chalk icicles. Limestone. 
Volcanic action. Carbonic acid, and what it produced. 
The caves of the world. What is learned in searching 
caves. Their archaeological knowledge. A peculiar 
formation in the large chamber. A platform within 
a recess. Skulls and skeletons. Ancient weapons. 
Evidences of a terrible conflict. Musket balls. Dirks 
and unknown forms of weapons. Singular copper 
receptacles. Curiously wrought knives. Articles of 
furniture. Decayed clothing. Kitchen utensils. Why 
the cave takes care of the smoke. 


IV 


CONTENTS 


VII. The Treasures op the Cave Page 84 

The couch in the recess. Chests of gold. A pirates* 
lair. The ancient coins. Peculiar articles of orna- 
ment. The lid with mocking lock. Rings; bracelets. 
The buccaneers. The sermon. Ghastly relics. A per- 
ceptible movement in the atmosphere. Startling sup- 
position. A possible outlet in the side of the hill. 
The slab of carbonate. The writing on it. An accident 
and the finding of other skeletons. The light shining 
into the cave. Discovery of the outlet. View of the 
cataract from the opening in the hillside. The boat 
in the cave. Taking it out by the hillside opening. 
The Professor’s search. Return of the boys with the 
team. Re-enter the cave. The Professor lost. Hunt- 
ing in the unknown passages. Return of the Professor, 
Taking two of the skeletons to the laboratory. 


VIII. Removing the Vessels from the Caverns .... Page 94 

Completion of the boat. Making a trial voyage. 
Rounding the cliffs. Trip to the south. The forests 
and the mountains. On the south coast. A raging 
storm. Seasickness and dizziness at great heights. 
The calcareous slab from the cave. The letters on it. 
Photography. Reagents. Photographic light. X-rays. 
Taking the copper vessels from the cave. Gathering 
up the bones. Evidences of the strife. Spanish in- 
scriptions. Gold bullion. Silver ornaments and ves- 
sels. Decayed chests. The coins. Peculiar guns. Non- 
effective powder. Disappearance of Angel. Return 
of Angel with a rusted modern gun. Iron or steel 
guns. Powder as a factor in making weapons. 


CONTENTS 


V 


IX. Making Electricity Page 106 

Their present condition. What they had accomplished. 
Working for love. Contemplating the hoard in the 
cave. Selfishness at the bottom* of the pirates’ lives. 
Gathering sugar cane. Honey, and its uses in ancient 
times. Beets and various tubers. Fattening proper- 
ties. Nitrogenous matter. Tlie load of cane. Making 
a sugar mill. Lime in sugar-cane juice. Clarifying 
sugar. A candy pulling. Granulating sugar. The 
earth as a magnet. Electricity. Positive and nega- 
tive. Magnetic poles. Likes and unlikes. Making a 
magnet. Retaining magnetism in a bar. 

X. Starting on the Voyage to the West Page 118 

A barometer. Air pressure. A compass. The atmos- 
phere. Dry weather. Observing weather conditions. 
Providing compartments in the boat for provisions. 
Bedding. Water supply. Faith. Preparing a tablet 
for the Cataract. A terrific storm. A delayed de- 
parture. How delays have often proved valuable to 
investigators. Starting the voyage to the west. Strik- 
ing a course. Observations on speed. Going with the 
wind. Tacking. Angles of incidence. The action of 
air on a surface. Determining the pressure of air by 
its velocity. Flying machines. Time and speed in a 
vessel. Qualities necessary in a sailor. 

XI. A Terrible Voyage and the Shipwreck Page 131 

The shadows of night. Recalling memories of their 
shipwreck. The charting board. Cardinal points of 
the compass. How direction traveled is laid out on 
the chart. Measurement by angles. A weary night. 


vi 


CONTENTS 


The watches. The wind changing. The second day. 
Cliffs beyond. Sailing against the wind. Rounding 
the northern point. The fourth day. The increasing 
gale. Night. The lights to the south. The gale 
turning to a storm. Driven back. A night without 
sleep. An appalling monsoon. Springing a leak. The 
Professor exhausted. Danger ahead. The cliffs. A 
maelstrom in sight. Averting the danger. Recovery 
of the Professor. Steering for shore. Striking the 
beach. The vessel shattered. Stranded miles from 
home. Taking up the march. Putting an inscription 
on the boat. Nearing home. 

XII. The Retubn Tkip. The Orang-outans Page 145 

The blackened fire space. Discovery of their own 
camp in the forest. An adventure in the woods. A 
huge bear. George’s shot. Charging the Professor, 
and his shot. Attacking George. Safety behind a 
fallen tree. Search for the luggage. The cries of 
Angel. The bear finding their packages. The bear 
making use of their things. What they had left. The 
yellow pear. Guava. The coffee tree. Cherries. 
Gathering coffee berries. How Angel made himself 
imderstood. His excitement. The discovery of a num- 
ber of orang-outans. Red Angel visits them. He is 
not welcomed. Return of the animal. The clearing 
in the woods. Recalling the fight of the bears over 
the honey. 

XIII. The Strange Visitor Page 157 

The flag on Observation Hill. Approaching Cataract. 
The alarm by Red Angel. The house intact. Discov- 
ery of a man at the stable. His peculiar actions. 


CONTENTS 


Vll 


Lost memory. Aphasia. Unable to speak. Eecogniz- 
ing the signal flag on the strange man. Provided with 
clothing. A peculiar malady. The instinct of self- 
preservation. Going with George to Observation Hill. 
The actions of a sailor. The stranger visits the work- 
shop. Expert with the use of tools. Projecting an 
exploring trip by land. Naming the stranger, John. 
Startled at sound of the name. Mechanically perform- 
ing work. Examining the skulls. 

XIV. An Exciting Trip to the Falls Page 167 

The food supply. Butter. Cream. Centrifugal mo- 
tion. Difference in specific gravity between cream and 
milk. Making a cream separator. Vegetables. Onions. 
Chives. The stranger as a prospector. Procuring 
samples. Peculiarities of his malady. An exciting 
encounter with a bear. John’s skill as a hunter. An- 
other honey tree. Killed with a spear. The bear pelt. 
Visiting the falls. Action to indicate that John recog- 
nizes the falls. 

XV. The Story of the Cave Page 177 

Mystery about John. Humanity’s search. The desire 
to know and acquire. Gathering supplies for an ex- 
tended trip by land. The boys visit the cave. Deter- 
mine to search the chamber visited by the Professor. 
Gk)rgeous calcareous hangings. The ghosts of past cen- 
turies. Gold and silver vessels. Skeletons. A recess. 
A row of chests. Spanish guns. The chained skele- 
tons in the recess. An arsenal. The struggle. Locked 
in the embrace of death. Ancient origin of the cave. 
Paleontology. Stone and bronze ages. Atlantis, the 
greats continent in the Atlantic, which disappeared. 


Vlll 


CONTENTS 


story of the Egyptian priests. The actinic rays. 
Purifying action of sunlight. Bacteria. Glass houses. 
The eye. How it expresses character. Laughter. How 
it brightens the eye. Fishhooks. A fishing party. 
The salmon. 

XVI. Music and Animals Page 189 

. Preserving fish. Why heat is used. The use of tin 
for cans. Music. The violin made by the boys. Vio- 
lin strings; what they are made of. How they are 
prepared and treated. The concert. How the music 
affected Bed Angel. John enraptured. How it touched 
him. The change in his eyes. The field mouse. How 
different animals are moved by music. The lion. 
Hippopotamus. Tigers. Monkeys. Momentary flashes 
of intelligence in John. Building a new wagon. Find- 
ing and making paint. Lead. Fermentation. Flax. 
Driers. Turpentine. Synthetic food. Analysis. Tubes 
for powder. Completing the guns. Stocking the wagon 
with provisions. Starting on the trip. Jack and Jill. 
The sixth trip. 

XVII. The Trip Through the Dense Forest Page 201 

The trip along Cataract River. Tlie great forest. 
How Angel traveled. Reaching South River. Discov- 
ering a second falls. Where the debris on a seashore 
comes from. The jungle. Leaving the river. The 
two animals in the night. The camp aroused. A fight 
in the dark. The puma. The frightened team. The 
injured yak. Animal language. The panther. Trying 
to avoid the forest. Growing denser. John and Harry 
scouting through the forest. Blazing a trail. The 
hidden luncheon. End of the forest. Returning to 


CONTENTS 


IX 


the wagon. The noise in their path. The wagon fol- 
lowing the trail. The injured yak improving. 

XVIII. Seeing the First Savages Page 213 

Teaching Angel. Finding a campfire. Determine from 
the conditions that it was recently made. Prospecting- 
from the tops of trees. A climbing ring. How made 
and used. The climbing operation. Harry sees an- 
other forest to the south. Clear in the west. The 
woimded yak calls a halt. Eesuming the journey, 
Harry in the grasp of a giant anaconda. John severs- 
its body with a bolo. Boa constrictor. The python. 
The Cashew tree. Gum arabic. Seeing the West 
River. Discovering signs of habitations to the south. 
Course to be followed in meeting the natives. Hear- 
ing voices in the night. Crackling of twigs. A party 
of savages. The next morning. Examining the tracks 
made by the midnight party. Following the trail 
thus made. The open country. The first view of the 
inhabitants. 



. <3 


..• 7 ^ 




a 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 


“The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it 


to Gleorge ” Frontispiece 

PAGE 

“ ‘ We have probably found a pirate’s lair, and here is the 

booty ’ ” 86 

“The Professor walked toward him and held out his hand”. .166 
“ With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed 

above the last coil ” 214 

The Broken Yoke 23 

Top View of Boat 29 

Side View of Boat 29 

Cross Section of Boat 31 

Force of Momentum 33 

Red Angel 33 

The Color Spectrum 38 

Reflection Angle 39 

The Hidden Message 43 

The First Gun 48 

The Bullet 57 

The Sea-going Boat 58 

The Cave 75 

The Slab Found in the Cave 98 

Old Coins Found in Cave 101 

Cane Crusher 110 

A Magnet 112 

Magnetic Induction 113 

The Two Magnets 115 

Making a Permanent Magnet 117 

Illustrating Wind Pressure, 1 127 

Illustrating Wind Pressure, 2 127 

Mariner’s Compass 132 

Chart of the Voyage 133 


XI 


xii MYSTERIES OP THE CAVERN 


PAGE 

The Charting Board 134 

Guava 150 

Coffee 151 

Cream Separator 168 

The Lion and Cubs J 195 

The Puma 206 

The Acajou 219 


THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


CHAPTER I 

MYSTEKIOUS DISAPPEAEANCE OF THE TEAM 

The boys looked at the Professor in amazement. 
They were too much excited and concerned at the 
new situation to be able to interpret what the 
sudden disappearance of their team meant. 

The Professor turned to the boys: ‘^Are you 
sure the yaks were tied before we left themf’ 

‘T was particularly careful,” answered Harry, 
‘To tie both of them.” 

‘T am pretty sure that both were securely fast- 
ened, and they were in that condition when I came 
back the last time,” was George’s reply. 

To understand the peculiar situation above re- 
ferred to, it will be necessary to go back and briefly 
relate some of the remarkable events which had 
taken place in the lives of the three people con- 
cerned in this history. 

George Mayfield and Harry Crandall, together 
with a Professor, were mates on a ship training 
school, which sailed from New York one year be- 
fore. A terrific explosion at sea cast them adrift 
in mid-Pacific Ocean, and after five days of suf- 
fering they were cast ashore on an apparently 
uncharted island, without any food, and entirely 
devoid of any tools, implements or weapons. 

11 


12 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Exercising the knowledge of the Professor, and 
the ingenuity of the boys, they gradually dug from 
mother earth and from the rocks and trees the 
articles necessary to sustain life, and eventu- 
ally they found ditferent ores from which vari- 
ous implements and weapons were made. They 
constructed numerous machines, crude, at first, 
and gradually developed them. They succeeded 
in capturing yaks, a bovine species of animals, 
some of which were trained like oxen; wagons 
were built ; a shop constructed ; a water wheel in- 
stalled ; a primitive sawmill put up ; a primary bat- 
tery made ; articles of clothing woven ; felt made ; 
and numerous things of this character originated 
from material which nature had furnished in its 
crude state. 

While doing all this the desire to explore the 
island was a predominating one. Four trips into 
the interior had been made in order to ascertain 
whether or not it contained any human beings. 
During those trips numerous evidences were 
found to show that savages were there, and some 
indications that civilized people had visited the 
island. 

The peculiar happenings which excited their in- 
terest were the mysterious things that occurred at 
various times, among which the following may be 
briefly enumerated : The disappearance of a 
boat, which they built, and which was left at the 
place where the team was lost; the subsequent 
finding of the boat among debris on the seashore, 
having oars and rope in it which were strange 
to them; the removal of the flagpole and flag 


MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE 13 


which had been erected up on a high point near 
the ocean, called Observation Hill, and the fire in 
the forest. 

To the foregoing may be added the discovery 
of a prospecting hole, which had been dug, evi- 
dently, by some one in the hope of finding mineral ; 
a yak with a brand on it; wreckage of a boat, 
which, undoubtedly, belonged to their ill-fated 
ship; a gruesome skeleton on the * seashore ; and 
finally one of the lifeboats of the schoolship and 
a companion to their own, found on the shore of 
the stream where they now were. 

All these things were sufficient not only to cause 
alarm, but the greatest consternation on the part 
of the boys. It must be said, however, that the 
trials of the boys, under the calm, calculating de- 
portment of the Professor, had done much to make 
them self-reliant. George, the elder, was of an 
exceedingly inquisitive turn of mind; he was a 
theorist, and tried to find out the reason for every- 
thing. On the other hand, Harry was practical 
in all his efforts ; he could take the knowledge ob- 
tained and profit by it, as the previous volumes 
show. It was fortunate, therefore, as the Pro- 
fessor put it, that theory and practice were per- 
sonified in the two boys, who, although companion- 
able, were the exact opposites as types. 

The Professor never showed a preference, in 
any manner, for either. Like the true philosopher 
he saw the value of the two distinct qualities, the 
one useless without the other. 

When they had fully recovered from their as- 


14 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


tonishment, George was the first to speak. ‘^They 
may have broken the fastenings.” 

The Professor, who had been intently examining 
the tree to which they were hitched, said: ‘T 
can find no evidence of any undue wrench which 
might show that they had gotten away by their 
own exertions. Let us see whether we can follow 
the trail.” 

The ground was covered with leaves, so that 
no earth was visible, and the only sort of trail 
left in a forest, under those conditions, is the 
slightly depressed tracks which the wheels make. 
They examined this, noting also the overturned 
leaves, which are usually left in the wake of 
cattle. 

The latter means seemed to be the only available 
way in which any trace could be made out, and this 
they followed. It led directly to the west, and 
toward the section they were desirous of exploring 
at the time the present trip was inaugurated. 

^‘How fast do you suppose the team is travel- 
ing?” 

“Certainly not faster than we are now going. 
They cannot be hurried very well, as you know, 
and we should be able to overtake them within an 
hour or two.” 

“But what shall we do if we find them in charge 
of somebody?” 

That suggestion brought up at once a very seri- 
ous question. They had made six pistols, very 
crude, it is true, but which served admirably as 
weapons of defense; but the hazardous part of 
the present situation was that only the Professor 


MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE 15 


had one of the pistols, the others having been left 
with the team. The only thing which added some 
comfort was the knowledge that as the pistols re- 
quired a special hook to enable them to cock the 
firing ping, and as the Professor had this hook, 
those who took the team might not be able to use 
the weapons against them. 

At this place it might be well to refer to Red 
Angel. Nearly nine months before, on one of 
their trips, a baby orang-outan had been cap- 
tured, and the boys educated him, as best they 
could, and he really developed many reasonable 
instincts. It was Red Angel who left the wagon 
and followed them down the river, and who by 
his peculiar actions attracted attention to their 
missing team. 

^^We owe something to Angel for his cuteness 
in coming for us,” said Harry. 

The orang progressed rapidly, swinging, as he 
did, from tree to tree on the route, and when no 
trees were in sight, would shamble along in a pecu- 
liar way, as it is difficult for them to walk erect. 
Their feet are not adapted to promote a graceful 
gait. 

‘^The track seems to be lost,” said the Professor, 
cannot make it out, either from the leaves or 
the depression. However, it appears best to fol- 
low this course.” 

Without stopping they proceeded in the same 
general direction. Red Angel, who up to this time 
had followed the route taken by the party, now 
turned to the right, and when George called, re- 
fused to return. As George walked toward him, 


16 MYSTERIES OP THE CAVERNS 


he kept advancing to the right, and could not be in- 
duced to come back. 

^Trobably we should follow him,” was the Pro- 
fessor’s conclusion. 

It was evident from Angel’s antics that the 
change in the course delighted him. 

George, who was ahead, soon stopped, and 
shouted back, gleefully. ‘‘Here are the tracks! 
Good fellow, come here 1” 

Angel understood this. He had actually sensed 
the direction taken by the missing team, for here 
were the tracks. The only thing that grieved 
George was the absence of the honey pot. Angel’s 
weakness was honey, and that was now with the 
team. 

Suddenly Angel, who was now in one of the large 
trees which grew all along the course, began an 
excitable chatter, and vigorously jumped from one 
limb to the next, and George, who knew his antics 
pretty well by this time, stopped and prepared 
himself for some new and unexpected develop- 
ment in this remarkable journey. Angel, on the 
other hand, started otf through tlie trees with won- 
derful agility, and it was all the boys could do 
to follow. 

There, ahead of them, was the wagon perched 
against a tree, one of the front wheels and an 
axle broken, and the tongue wrenched off; but 
the yaks had disappeared. It is singular that the 
team had gone thus far without meeting an ob- 
struction. As it was, one wheel had locked with 
a tree, and the yaks, by their tremendous power, 
had broken the parts mentioned and gone on. 


MYSTEEIOUS DISAPPEARANCE 17 


Before the wagon was reached, however, num- 
bers of articles were found scattered along the 
trail, which were gathered up. 

The finding of the wagon was an intense relief. 
Their minds had been perturbed with this occur- 
rence, as never before, and they had met numerous 
thrilling episodes before. 

^‘Something must have frightened the yaks, and 
they were going at a much greater speed than at 
a walk when they collided with the tree,” observed 
the Professor. 

“Why do you think so asked Harry. 

“In the first place, the fact that our articles 
were scattered along the path before they reached 
the tree; and, secondly, the wagon pole and the 
wheel were strong enough to hold the yaks against 
the tree if they had been moving along at their 
usual gait.” 

“Well, I am thankful that we have the wagon, 
even though the yaks are gone,” said George, as 
he crawled into it. He peered out and continued 
in a surprised tone : “Where do you suppose the 
pistols are? Did you leave yours in the box, 
Harry ?” 

“Yes ; on the right side. Yours were there at the 
time. I saw all of them.” 

“They are not here now, and it is likely they 
have been lost with some of the other things.” 
Harry was up in an instant. 

“Where is the ammunition?” 

“It was all in the bottom of the box.” 

It did not seem at all likely that the pistols or 
the ammunition could fall out of the box. It is 


18 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEBNS 


true other things had fallen along the way, but 
this seemed to be such an unlikely occurrence that 
they could scarcely credit it. 

The provisions were safe, and you may be sure 
that Angel was not only petted, but he received a 
good share of the delicious sweet. 

It was now nearing night, and they were fully 
ten miles from home. Ten miles is not a long 
tramp, but to travelers like ours, already weary 
with their trudging and with the excitements of 
the day, it was concluded to camp in the wagon for 
the night, and then proceed home early in the 
morning. To take the wagon would be an impos- 
sibility. 

They really learned to love the patient yaks. 
For fully five months they had been daily compan- 
ions, and were now so well trained that some dis- 
couragement was felt at being compelled again to 
break in others. They had an ample supply of 
good material in the herd to pick from, but it took 
time and patience to develop such a team as had 
been lost. 

During the entire night one of the trio kept 
watch, not so much from a feeling of fear as in 
the hope the yaks would return during the night ; 
but they were doomed to disappointment. Morn- 
ing came, but the yaks did not, and after gather- 
ing together the most useful belongings, and put- 
ting them into convenient bundles for carrying 
purposes, set out for home. 

The first question taken up by the boys after 
their return was the selection of a pair of young 
steers for the new team ; and the work of making 


MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE 19 


a new pair of yokes was carried forward with 
energy. They were in the midst of the planting 
season which had been interrupted when the last 
journey was undertaken. 

Hitherto it had been the custom to devote at 
least one day each week to hunting, on which occa- 
sions they also made trips to such points in the 
island as had not been previously visited; and it 
was also a part of their duty to examine the woods 
and the fields to find new specimens of plants, 
fruits and flowers ; and among the hills and ravines 
were many kinds of ore, some of which they had 
been fortunate enough to find on their entry to 
the island. 

The metals thus found were utilized, because 
they had set up a workshop alongside the saw- 
mill, and in it had a crude lathe adapted to work 
in wood or iron. It will thus be seen that each 
tour was for prospecting purposes, to supply their 
needs, as well as to learn what the island con- 
tained. 

Each evening it was the habit to have a general 
discussion concerning the events of the day, or 
with reference to matters of moment about the 
work to be done on the morrow. 

George was much interested in the planting pro- 
gram. ^‘What kinds of vegetable would it be 
most advisable to plant in the space we have pre- 
pared?” 

“One of the important points to consider in the 
planting of all crops is whether the soil is adapted 
for it. When the United States were first settled 
it was a surprising thing that many of the original 


20 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 

settlers would go miles inland, exposed to every 
sort of danger, to find land, when there was plenty 
nearer the seashore or close to civilization. There 
was a reason for that which we are only now 
beginning fully to understand. Plants have a 
habit of growing in soil adapted for their needs, 
and it would be an interesting study in going 
over our island to consider the habits of plants 
in this respect.” 

^Ts that the reason why different countries have 
such different kinds of plants?” 

“Yes ; plants select their soil, and owing to these 
habits, every variety of soil, in every climate, sup- 
ports its own vegetable tribes. Of the five thou- 
sand flowering plants of central Europe, only 
three hundred grow on peaty soils, and those are 
mainly rushes and sedges. In the native forests 
of northern Europe and America, the unlettered 
explorer hails with joy the broad-leaved trees glit- 
tering in the sun among the pines, as a symptom 
of good land, which he knows how to cultivate. 
The rudest peasant in Europe knows that wheat 
and beans seek clay soils; the northern German 
knows that rye alone and the potato are best 
adapted for the blowing sands of that country; 
the Chinese peasant, that the warm sloping banks 
of light land are fitted for the tea plant, and stiff, 
wet, impervious flooded clays for his rice. Even 
the slaves in the Southern States were aware that 
open alluvial lands were best suited to cotton ; and 
the degraded slaves of Pernambuco know that the 
cocoa grows only on the sandy soils of the coast, 
just the same as in west Africa the oil palms flour- 


MYSTEKIOUS DISAPPEAEANCE 21 


ish on the moist sea sand that skirts the shore, and 
the mangroves where muddy shallows are daily 
deserted by the retiring tide.” 

‘^Some time ago you stated in one of our talks 
that soil was the necessary thing to select in order 
to propagate, or make good fruit and grain out of 
the poor or wild kind. Were all our vegetables 
and grains originally wildf’ 

“Originally nothing in the way of fruit, flower, 
grain or garden vegetables was anything but wild 
and unproductive, or bitter, tasteless or unprofit- 
able. Chemical changes are made in the plant by 
the soil in which it grows, because it is from the 
soil that it gets its food. The large and juicy 
carrot found at home is nothing but the woody 
spindle of the wild carrot, and I have found sev- 
eral species of it here. Cabbages, cauliflowers, 
Brussels sprouts and a host of other like vegeta- 
bles were, in their natural state, poor, woody, bit- 
ter stems, and had useless roots. As I have al- 
ready stated, the wild potato, which we are now 
cultivating, has, in its original state, a bitter root, 
as you have discovered.” 


CHAPTER II 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 

Early the following morning Harry sprang out 
of bed and hurriedly shouted : ^‘What did we do 
with the lifeboat in South River! Do you remem- 
ber whether we secured it when Angel came up 
and let us know about the team!^^ 

The Professor and George were up in an in- 
stant. George was the first to answer. left it 
the moment Angel came up.” 

‘T cannot remember,” said the Professor, slowly, 
‘‘but it seems to me, now that I think of it, we 
left it on the banks, and it wouldn’t do to leave it 
there. You must go for it at once, and bring it 
down to the bay, even though you cannot bring it 
around the cliffs.” 

A hurried breakfast was prepared and the boys 
started off at an eager pace for the river. They 
went directly southwest, aiming to strike the river 
near the falls, and after passing over familiar 
ground, came within several miles of it, when, in 
going down one of the sloping descents, saw, in 
the distance, what appeared to be portion of the 
yoke which the yaks carried. 

They hurried forward, and great was the delight 
at finding it was really one of those they had made 
and used for months. It was a gratification to 
know that the animals were east of the falls, and, 
probably, sooner or later, would turn up at their 
22 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 23 

home. Only one of the yokes was found, but there 
was evidence that both of the yaks were freed, 
since the part of the other yoke was still attached 
to the part found. 

The boys were glad of this, as they had such a 
friendly feeling for the animals that they could 
not but feel that to be yoked together in the forest 
would be a cruelty to them. 

^‘The Professor will be glad to know this,” said 
George. “Look at this part of the yoke, where it 
has been broken. I have no doubt that this is 





The Broken Yoke 

where they struck the tree where the wagon 
caught.” 

“Let us take it with us, by all means,” said 
Harry. An examination of the yoke plainly 
showed where it had come in contact with bark 
with considerable force. “What do you suppose 
caused them to be so frightened as to run away?” 

They quickened their steps, and soon reached 
the river. There, on the shore, was the lifeboat, 
as they had left it, and it was the work of minutes 
only to set it adrift, and after depositing the yoke 
in the bottom, the first task was to supply them- 
selves with a pair of oars. 

The first article turned out in the way of tools 


24 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 

was a bolo, a heavy cleaver-like blade, used by 
many primitive tribes. This article was dupli- 
cated by them, and always carried on all their ex- 
peditions. With this several small trees were cut 
down, and a pair of oars fashioned for each, and 
within an hour they were on their way down the 
stream, and in two hours more had rounded the 
point of projecting land east of the river mouth. 

^‘DonT let us take any more chances of losing 
this boat. I am in favor of taking it around, and 
am willing to risk the tide, whatever it may be.” 

Harry’s suggestion met with favor on the part of 
George, and when the point was rounded and they 
were out in the ocean, the tide, although coming 
in, had no terrors for them, but they boldly plied 
the oars, and before four o’clock had rounded 
the clitf point, and steered the craft into the mouth 
of Cataract Eiver. 

The Cataract was a much smaller stream than 
South Eiver, and it was on the northern side of 
the island ; whereas South Eiver was on the south- 
erly side of the island. Less than a quarter of a 
mile from the open sea was a cataract, at which 
their home was located, and the cataract was util- 
ized as the means for producing water power. 

Their appearance below the Cataract was hailed 
with delight by the Professor, and you may be 
sure that when the boat was finally landed and 
hauled up on the beach, all of them joined in the 
congratulations, which was their due. 

“Just to think of it. If we had the boat we 
made, our lifeboat and all the parts of the wreck 
of the other boat, we would have a pretty respecta- 
ble navy,” was Harry’s observation, when they 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 25 


landed. As it was, they now had the wrecked 
after part of their own lifeboat, and here was the 
other lying alongside. They knew the history of 
one of them. Would they soon know why the 
other should have been found in the interior of 
the island under such peculiar circumstances? 

‘‘And where did you get the yoke?’’ asked the 
Professor, as his eye caught sight of it. 

“Two miles this side of the falls.” 

They little knew at this time what an important 
bearing the finding of this boat would have on 
their future course, nor could they know how this 
little incident would be of the greatest value to 
some of their companions on the ill-fated ship. 

They now had possession of a boat which, while 
it was practically unsinkable, was not of such size 
as to meet their demands for the intended explora- 
tions. They felt that to attempt to circumnavigate 
the island and take all the chances which a meeting 
with natives might involve, would necessitate a 
much larger vessel. To add to the difficulty, all 
the pistols but one had been lost in the last trip, 
and to attempt to make explorations without 
proper weapons would be foolhardy. If they knew 
one thing, with any degree of certainty, it was that 
the island contained savages of some description, 
and provision must be made for every contin- 
gency. 

Harry took upon himself the task of turning 
out more of the weapons, and with the experience 
of the past four months in this line of work, con- 
cluded he would attempt a better job than simply 
making pistols. It was his ambition to make a 
firearm that would enable them to bag the largest 


26 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


game, and also, at the same time, carry the bul- 
lets a greater distance than the short eight-inch 
barrels could. 

To do this it was necessary to provide longer 
bits, and as the design of the new guns contem- 
plated a barrel at least eighteen inches long, the 
bits had to be longer, in proportion, and the mak- 
ing of these consumed nearly as much time as 
the actual drilling out of the barrels. 

George and the Professor put in a great deal of 
time with the new team. Their knowledge of 
training, in view of the former experience with 
these animals, was such that within a week they 
could drive the yaks without much difficulty, al- 
though the new team was not by any manner of 
means as efficient as the lost one. 

When the question of the kind of material for 
the guns came up, Harry was much concerned, 
as in making the barrels that length would neces- 
sarily greatly increase the weight. 

think it would be better to make an alloy for 
your purposes,” said the Professor, as they were 
discussing the matter. 

^^What is an alloy f” 

“It is the combination of two or more metals.” 

“In what way does the alloy make it better than 
the hardest steel?” 

“It is not hardness you want, but toughness. 
Metals have several properties, which are utilized 
for various purposes in the arts. Surprising as 
it may seem, wood has greater resisting power 
than diamond, and yet the precious stone is the 
hardest of all substances.” 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 27 


if we unite two metals are we not then mak- 
ing a new metal f ’ 

^‘Not necessarily so. In the case of brass it is 
true. This is made by uniting two parts of cop- 
per and one of zinc. Both copper and zinc in 
themselves are very soft, and copper cannot well 
be polished in its pure state. Brass, however, is 
not only much harder, but is susceptible of a very 
fine polish.” 

“Are the alloys of all metals harder than the 
metals of which they are made!” 

“This seems to be a universal law in the com- 
pounding of metals. Very few metals are used 
alone in the various arts and manufactures. For 
every purpose some combination has been found 
which makes the product better. Even coins are 
so alloyed. Silver and gold in the form of money 
would be entirely too soft, unless alloyed with 
some hardening metal. Some substances, like ar- 
senic, antimony and bismuth, are too brittle to be 
used alone. The only metals which can be used 
alone are aluminum, zinc, iron, tin, copper, lead, 
mercury, silver, gold and platinum.” 

“What is bronze, of which all the ancient guns 
were made!” 

“That is a combination of copper and tin. This 
product was known fully seven hundred years be- 
fore the Christian era, and was used in the mak- 
ing of guns until superseded by the various steel 
alloys of our day.” 

“In what proportions are copper and tin united 
to make bronze!” 

“The proportions vary greatly. Ancient Celtic 


28 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


bronze had 12 parts tin and 88 of copper ; Egyp- 
tian, 22 tin, 78 copper; Chinese, 20 tin, 80 copper; 
Roman, 15 tin, 85 copper; and in many specimens 
lead and zinc were also nsed. Tin has a capacity 
to harden almost any metal.” 

“What is the best metal to harden steel!” 

“Manganese, of which yon will remember we 
have some samples; it is the most serviceable, as 
we have neither nickel nor chromium.” 

“What amount of that metal should we use to 
get the best results!” 

“About 14 per cent, of manganese has been 
found the best for such purposes as would be re- 
quired in gun barrels. There is a curious thing 
which has been discovered in uniting manganese 
with steel. It becomes fairly tough if 1 per 
cent, is used with the steel ; if the quantity added 
is between and the strength and ductility 
decrease; but above that, up to 5 per cent., the 
steel becomes brittle; above per cent, it again 
returns to ductility and toughness and its maxi- 
mum strength is found at 14 per cent.” 

During the evenings all took a hand at cutting 
out the stocks for the guns, and the plans upon 
which they were constructed will be fully explained 
and illustrated in the order of the work done. 

Meanwhile it must not be supposed that work 
on the new boat had ceased. Harry’s plan, when 
fully worked out, provided for one twenty feet 
long and six and a half feet wide amidships. 

The drawing (Pig. 2) shows the construction 
of the hull. As they had no means for doing any 
fancy bending of the boards, the bottom was made 
flat, and the sides sloping. The bottom and the 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 29 


30 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


sides were made in the following manner: Two 
stringers (A, A) were first constructed, which 
were made up of thin pieces nailed together, so 
they could he bent in the proper shape for the 
bottom boards, which were laid crosswise and 
nailed to these stringers. 

For the upper edges of the sides, called the gun- 
wale (B, B), similar stringers were provided, but 
they extended farther fore and aft, and amidships 
were fully six and a half feet apart, whereas the 
lower stringers amidships were four and a half 
feet apart. This arrangement, therefore, pro- 
vided for sloping sides, and the side pieces ran up 
and down on the inner course. It will be under- 
stood that the sides and bottom thus formed were 
to be overlaid with thin boards running fore and 
aft, as in Fig. 2, as they had no means for match- 
ing the boards and thus putting them together 
tightly. ^ 

The sides were tw-o and a half feet high. Six 
and a half feet from the forward end was a cross 
beam (C), into which the mast was to be stepped. 
At the stern the bottom was sloping upwardly at 
an angle and brackets (D) were extended back 
and joined at their rear ends, to which the lower 
end of the rudder post was attached. 

Amidships a keel (E) was formed, projecting 
down from the bottom, this keel being, at its widest 
part, two feet, and tapering down to merge with 
the bottom, fore and aft. The cross section (Fig. 
3) shows how well he had formed the vessel, pro- 
portionally. 

In addition to the cross seats, similar arrange- 
ments for comfort were made along the sides, and 


WOEKING ON THE NEW BOAT 31 

beneath the side seats were spaces in which their 
supplies were to be placed. The space forward 
of the mast was entirely closed over with a roof 
which sloped in both directions, and here provi- 
sion was made for two berths. This would also 
afford them protection and serve as a means to 
keep out the water and insure at least one dry spot 
for their comfort. 

As usual, George had some inquiries to make 
about the boat. ^Tt has always been a matter of 



wonder why all boats are made with the big bulg- 
ing part nearest the forward endf^ 

The Professor^s eyes twinkled. ^Trobably 
there are a great many others who have had such 
thoughts. There is really no reason for it. It is 
not known how the custom originated, except that 
in sailing vessels the claim is that the ship can be 
maneuvered more easily by such construction.” 
‘Tn what way does it make it easier to handle f ” 
^When a ship is driven forward by the wind, all 
the force exerted on the sails is transferred to the 
forward part of the ship, hence if made narrow 


32 MYSTEEIES OP THE CAVEENS 


at its forward end it would be driven down into 
the water, and the hull would, therefore, be sub- 
merged more at the forward than at the rear end. 
Furthermore, by having a tapering rear end, the 
rudder has a better opportunity of veering the' 
ship around and you can see that the bulging part, 
being located forward of the middle portion of the 
ship, acts as a sort of pivot.” 

^‘But it seems to me that none of the reasons 
given will apply to a steamship, and still all the 
ships I have seen are made in the same way as 
the sailing vessels.” 

^‘That is exactly what I inferred in my answer 
to your first question. The truth is, that in ex- 
periments which have been made, it is shown that 
to have the widest part of a steamer near the stern, 
gives lines to a hull which has less resistance than 
if made in the conventional way.” 

“I thought probably the reason for making them 
so was just the same as in the case of an arrow, 
where the heaviest part is at the forward end.” 

‘Tn that case an entirely different principle is 
involved. A body falls, or is projected through 
the air, with its heaviest end foremost, because 
of the greater momentum in that portion.” 

“It is the force of a body in motion. When a 
body is projected through the air it meets with 
the resistance of the atmosphere, and this also 
serves to turn the heavy side around to the for- 
ward end, because the force of momentum in the 
heavy end is much less affected by the resist- 
ance of the air than the lighter end.” (See Pig. 5.) 

Eed Angel had now been with them more than 
six months, and he was probably a year old. 


WOEKINa ON THE NEW BOAT 33 


^Wien first captured he was a scrawny infant, 
dull and stupid, like all of his class. He had won- 
derful powers in the way of imitating habits and 
customs. The boys were very good vocalists, and 
while at work Harry would sing, but George whis- 
tled. It was an amusing sight to watch Eed An- 
gel when the boys engaged in the frequent con- 
certs at night. 



2 ^ <5: 





But of all the screamingly funny exhibitions, the 
attempt of Angel to imitate whistling was the most 
ludicrous. The oranges lips project too much to 
a point, and the jaws are so narrowed that the 
lips will not pucker. Whenever the boys com- 
menced their concert Angel would be on hand, and 
enjoyed every moment of the time, and the boys 
had many a concert purely for his benefit. 

At the end of each concert the whistling would 
begin. This invariably brought Angel to the 
front, and his exhibitions would be given with the 
utmost gravity and earnestness. The invariable 
result would be such uproarious fits of laughter on 
the part of all that he would take part in the jolli- 
fication, little suspecting that the laughter was at 
his expense. 

The only sound which he could emit during these 


34 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


performances sounded like a high-pitched stick 
rattling along a pale fence ; but he was inordinately 
proud of it. It had always been on one key, here- 
tofore, and without variation; but this evening 
Angel startled himself, as he did the others, by 
actually sounding two additional notes. He re- 
peated this over and over. 

wonder if we could make him talk?” asked 
George, after the laughter had subsided. 

^There is no reason why some tones cannot be 
imitated. As the orang possesses wonderful pow- 
ers of imitation and has, in captivity, developed 
many traits, I see no reason why simple words, 
or sounds, cannot be taught.” 

‘T know there are words which he does under- 
stand. Time and again I have told him things, 
which he seems to understand. Now see if he un- 
derstands this : ^Angel, do you want some 
honey V ” 

His attempts at whistling ceased, and in a mo- 
ment more was in the kitchen. Harry, who by this 
time had recovered from his mirth, thought it 
would be a good idea to attempt to teach him. 

^Tf canary birds and dogs can understand lan- 
guage, I do not see why Angel shouldn’t.” 

“Unquestionably, any animal, by patience, will 
learn the meaning of sounds. Constant repetition 
of certain notes causes birds to repeat them. I 
have known dogs to perform almost anything they 
were told to do, although they are not able to utter 
a single sound of the words emitted in giving the 
command.” 

“Well, what is it that causes sound?” 


WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT 35 


^^The most wonderful thing in nature is, that 
she manifests herself in only one way, namely, 
by a movement, or a motion of some kind. Vibra- 
tion is the term used to designate this. Sound, 
light, heat, taste, smell, and everything which 
becomes sensible to us is produced by vibration. 
The movements of the heavenly bodies, swinging 
back and forth around the sun, like huge pendu- 
lums, the movement of the sap in trees, up and 
down, the beating of the heart, the winking eye- 
lids are all motions which show energy, develop- 
ment, life.” 

‘‘But what is it that makes us understand one 
sound from the others?” 

“Simply the difference in the kind of vibration. 
There are three things which characterize sounds ; 
namely, pitch, intensity and character. Pitch de- 
pends on the rapidity of the vibrations ; intensity 
on the extent or the amplitude of the vibrations ; 
and character on the substance or instrument pro- 
ducing them. To illustrate: When you sing a 
very high note the vibrations may be five thousand 
vibrations a second, or there may be only two thou-' 
sand during that time. That represents the pitch. 
In singing that note you may sing it so loud that, 
like a pendulum, it will swing way over to one 
side, or it may move only a short distance. That 
represents intensity. If either you or George had 
sung that note I should have been able to detect 
it, whatever its pitch or intensity, because your 
voices are as unlike as different musical instru- 
ments, and that is character, or timbre, as the 
French call it.” 


CHAPTER III 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 

While the work of getting out the planking for 
the boat was going on, and the plowing had now 
been resumed, since the new yoke of oxen were 
fitted to do the work, the boys were not forgetful 
of the usual weekly outing. They had several 
quite important things right at home which needed 
looking into, if they wanted to solve some of the 
things on the island First, the cave, which they 
had twice attempted to explore; the search for 
their lost boat, which had the strange rope and 
oars ; and the mystery of the flag and pole. 

These things weighed heavily on their minds, 
because these happenings were close at hand. But 
what made the greatest impression on the minds 
of all was the finding of the Investigator's life- 
boat. It seemed almost like a call to them from 
the interior. The impatience of the boys was 
almost beyond restraint at times. 

^Tt does seem to me that we should not delay 
an hour in making some effort to explore the di- 
rection the boat came from,” was George’s view 
of the situation as they canvassed the subject. 

‘^That is my idea, also, and I am not in favor 
of giving much more time to hunting or other 
forms of recreation until we know how that boat 
came to South River.” 

‘‘Yes; I can appreciate how anxious you are,” 
said the Professor, after the boys had given their 
36 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 


37 


views. ^‘What we are doing, however, is essential 
from every point of view. We must prepare pro- 
visions, so that we shall be able to know where 
we can get them in case of need. On the other 
hand, weapons are necessary, which take time to 
construct. If, however, it is thought advisable, 
we might make a trip of explorations along the 
South River, beyond the falls, the time to be lim- 
ited to a week ; but I have my doubts of the wis- 
dom of such a course.” 

This suggestion appealed strongly to the boys, 
who were always keen for anything which savored 
of adventure, and it was some time before the 
boys could reconcile themselves to the saner and 
more business-like course of completing the boat 
and making the trip by water. 

The weather was beautiful, and vegetation 
was springing up in abundant profusion every- 
where. Magnificent showers fell at intervals, and 
the rainbows, more beautiful than any they had 
ever heretofore seen, spanned the heavens after 
the showers. 

This had been noticed during the previous year, 
but now, after nine months of their life, with the 
wonderful insight which their needs had instilled 
into them, made them very observant of every 
phenomenon. 

“I have often wondered,” observed George, as 
he gazed at the beautiful broad band which formed 
a crescent across the heavens, ^Vhy there are 
never any rainbows in the middle of the day. They 
are never seen except in the morning or in the 
evening, and usually only in the evening.” 

‘Tn order to understand that it will be neces- 


38 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


sary to explain what a rainbow is. As I stated 
previously, light is merely vibration. Now colors 
are formed by the different lengths of the vibra- 
tions, just the same as the different musical notes 
are made by the different vibratory lengths. To 
understand this more fully, I make a sketch 
(Fig. 7), which shows just what I mean. You 
will see that red is the lowest musical pitch, which 
we will call C, and to the right is a long, wavy 
line. D, the next pitch higher, might resemble 



-n 

■ IndL^n - 

G...^ mm-- 

— Gr^ VWVWWV 

— aaaaa/vai 

Qcsase - -iVVW; 

2£a -NAA/; 

JTiff.Z 

The Color Spectrum 


orange, with the wavy line a little shorter, and 
so on, until we reach the highest note in the scale, 
where the wave lengths are very short. You have 
probably noticed that a drop of water in the sun- 
shine glistens, and, if closely observed, may have 
seen that it was colored, particularly blue or green. 
As the rays of the sun strike the globe of water, 
they produce different wave lengths, and in that 
way make it appear to you as being possessed of 
colors. Now, a rainbow is nothing more nor less 
than sunlight passing through the drops of water 
which are suspended in the air and causing a re- 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 


39 


fraction of the light. At noon the sun shines down 
from overhead, and we are not in the proper posi- 
tion to see this refracted light ; hut in the morning 
or in the evening the sun shines against the earth 
at an angle. At those times we are able to see the 
effect of refraction by the colors produced. 



Reflection Angle 


^‘When you throw a ball against a wall at an 
angle, it bounds away at the same angle. That 
is reflection, and is just exactly what light does 
when a ray strikes a mirror. If, on the other 
hand, the glass had no mercury on it to reflect 
the light, the ray would not go straight through, 
but would bend, just as you have seen a stick in 
a glass of water appearing as though it was bent 
below the water line. That is refraction.” 

Two weeks of very vigorous work had now been 
put in since the yaks had disappeared, and the 
wagon was still at the edge of the forest. George 
was anxious to recover it, with the new team, and 
with Harry started out early in the morning to 
make up as much as possible lost time, as every 
hour was considered valuable in their enterprises. 

The yaks could be ridden as well as horses, but 
the greater part of the way were driven. One of 
the guns which had been completed was taken 
along, as well as the only pistol which the Pro- 
fessor had saved. In less than three hours the 


40 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


forest was reached and they were soon within 
sight of the wagon. 

‘AVhat have we there f ’ cried Harry, as they 
neared the spot. 

^^Our yaks! And where do yon suppose they 
have beenf^ 

Close by the wagon were the yaks, as though 
patiently waiting for the boys. They made no 
resistance, nor show of fright, when the boys 
approached. One of them, Jack, still had the 
strap tied to the horns, and it was the halter 
which had been attached to the tree at South 
Eiver. 

A hasty examination was made, but if either of 
the boys came to any conclusion concerning it, 
nothing was said. Without wasting time, the 
team brought with them was yoked up and the 
broken wheel replaced by a new one. The repairs 
to the wagon tongue did not take long, and they 
were ready for the return. 

‘^AVhat shall we do with Jack and Jillf’ Those 
were the names bestowed on the first team. ‘‘Let 
us see if they will follow us.” 

They had gone fully one hundred feet before 
the yaks made any sign, and then slowly followed, 
thus assuring them that no care or attention 
would be required in that direction. Both boys 
were intensely delighted at the recovery of their 
favorites and could not get home fast enough to 
give the Professor the good news. 

Nearing home, the Professor, who was on the 
watch, came out to meet them, waving his hat at 
the sight of Jack and Jill. When the latter came 
up he went over and affectionately petted the 
creatures, who seemed to realize the welcome. 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 


41 


hope they are as glad as we are ; I can under- 
stand why they got away ; look at the end of this 
thong.’^ It plainly showed the teeth of some ani- 
mal which had gnawed the leather of which it was 
made. 

^^So yon have been out prospecting, toof’ was 
Harry’s query, as he saw the queer-looking reeds 
on the table in the laboratory that evening. 
^AYhat do you call that?” 

‘^Our honey has been getting low, and I took 
the occasion to-day to bring in some samples of 
sugar.” 

‘Ts that sugar cane?” 

^^Yes; the true sugar cane.” 

^Ts that ditferent from sorghum?” 

‘^This is the species which grows in the southern 
part of the United States. The kind you know 
and which is cultivated in the Northern States, 
is the Chinese Sorgo, or, as we call it, sorghum. 
It is equal in quality and in quantity to the south- 
ern species and is readily treated to produce mo- 
lasses or sugar.” 

‘AVhat is that peculiar flower, if it is a flower? 
I never saw a flower like that ; it seems to be hard.” 

was surprised to find this. It is called the 
Tamarisk. This long, oval-shaped part is made 
by an insect which inhabits the plant, and is eaten 
by the inhabitants in the plains east of the Medi- 
terranean Sea. It is there called Mount Sinai 
Manna, and is supposed to be the Manna which 
the Jews found when they were in the Wilderness 
after the Exodus.” 

“I think we have properly named this place 
Wonder Island.” 

In the volume preceding this, when they first 


42 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


considered the building of a new boat, it was de- 
cided to graft an extension to the after part of 
their wrecked lifeboat; but when the second one 
was found, and calculations were made as to its 
usefulness, it was discovered that such a course 
would not be wise; hence the larger vessel was 
found to be the only solution. 

The newly discovered boat was, however, a 
valuable addition, as it afforded a means by which 
short trips could be made, and Harry quietly set 
to work making a sail and rigging up a mast, so 
that the long-cherished desire to make these trips 
could be undertaken before they were ready to, 
launch the real vessel. It was hauled up on shore 
and caulked and new parts added to make it 
adaptable for the purpose. 

While engaged at this work he removed the 
cross seat which still remained, and in doing so 
was surprised to find a piece of cardboard which 
had been hidden, apparently, at the end of the 
board. Eagerly picking it up, he saw writing on 
it, with the following words: ^‘We cannot hold 
out much longer. Wright and Walters were cap- 
tured yesterday. Will.” 

Harry could hardly contain himself, as he 
rushed up to the laboratory, crying out : ‘^George, 
come here, quickly! I have found something!” 
Without waiting to see whether George heard, he 
rushed into the Professor’s den with the paper in 
his outstretched hand. ^^Look at this; don’t you 
remember Will Sayers? I am sure it is Will.” 

George heard his excited voice, and appeared 
without any delay. 

‘^What is it now?” 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 43 

The Professor was reading the scrap, and si- 
lently handed it to George. ^^Did you know either 
of the boys mentioned in tliis!^’ 

Neither had any recollection of Wright or Wal- 
ters, but they inferred that the writer must be 
Will Sayers, one of the companions. The Pro- 
fessor had no recollection of the boy, nor could 
he remember the other names. 

‘Tjet us examine every part of the boat,” was 
the Professor’s first suggestion. “We may find 
something more to give some clue.” 



— . . I* 

2 ^^. 9 . 


The Hidden Message 

The boys rushed down to the beach where the 
boat was moored, the Professor following. 

“Show us the exact location of this strip.” 

“I had just taken off this cross seat, and as I 
did so this piece fell from the end.” 

“Let us put it back again and see how it fits into 
that place.” 

When it was replaced they noticed that a crack 
was left at each end of the seat, not exceeding an 
eighth of an inch. 

“It is very plain that the piece you found was 


44 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEKNS 


at this end, and if it was folded as this crease in- 
dicates, it could have been concealed there and 
thus escaped our observation.” After some min- 
utes’ examination, he continued : ‘^This piece must 
have been there for some time.” 

^‘Why do you think so !” 

‘‘You will notice that the end of the board has 
the marks of the folded paper, showing it must 
have been in its place of concealment for some 
time. Furthermore, the paper itself indicates 
that it has been there for some time, by the discolo- 
ration on its outer side.” 

“How long do you think it may have been 
there ?” 

“It is impossible to say; but certainly for sev- 
eral months.” 

“Doesn’t it seem reasonable,” Harry inquired, 

“to think it was some one from the Investigator? 
Otherwise, how is it that they had possession of 
the boaff” i 

“That is the problem we shall now have to find \ 
out.” \ 

Thus, in another direction, was found an evi- | 

dence that savages were on the island and that J 

others had been wrecked and found a refuge there. 
How much of a refuge it was to them they had \ 
no means of knowing. They were thankful their 
own lives had been preserved and had been- per- 
mitted to accomplish so much during their en- 
forced stay. 

“We are now vigorous and strong and have 
been blessed with energy as well as health. It is 
our first duty to take up the task of finding our 
comrades, whatever the cost may .be. If that is 


THE HIDDEN MESSAGE 


45 


your view, we should proceed with that determi- 
nation, but let us prepare for it in the best man- 
ner possible. How long will it take to finish the 
six guns you are now atf said the Professor, 
looking at Harry. 

‘T will try to have them ready within another 
week,” was his reply. 

^Tn the meantime, George and I will prepare a 
new lot of powder ; and for your further informa- 
tion, I will state that I have been busy during the 
past week in making preparations to extract some 
lead for bullets.” 

This announcement was hailed with joy. Here- 
tofore they had to depend on the iron slugs which 
had been turned out, and they were not at all sat- 
isfactory, because they lacked the proper weight. 

‘^Which is the lead?” asked George, who was 
examining the samples. 

‘Tt is this bluish-gray sample of galena, which, 
as you see, looks like lead itself, and is often mis- 
taken for it; but it is far from being lead of the 
kind we can work.” 

^^Whynot?” 

‘^Because it is in what is called a sulphide form. 
Do you remember what a sulphide is?” 

^‘Yes; it is where it is in combination with 
something.” 

^‘That is a fairly good definition. More or less 
sulphur is found in all metals, but when found in 
large quantities the ore is called a sulphide.” 

^^How can we get rid of the sulphur?” 

‘AYe can cook it and drive it oft like steam. 
Lead melts at a low temperature, comparatively, 
about 600 degrees Fahrenheit, so that with our 


46 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

furnaces it* will be a very easy matter to get a 
pure lead/^ 

During tbe rest of tlie day all were in the labo- 
ratory, superintending the preparation for the 
work, and at the Professor’s suggestion the boys 
took the team in the morning and brought in over 
a hundred pounds of galena to be treated. 

Before noon they had forty pounds of a very 
fine quality lead, and the work of making molds 
for the bullets was begun. The Professor, how- 
ever, suggested that the boys should devote their 
time to the construction of the boat and guns, 
and it was difficult to decide what was the proper 
thing to do first. 

The Professor saw the dilemma and had a very 
earnest conference on the subject. 

^‘You must not, by any means, be carried away 
with undue eagerness and a desire for haste. The 
first essential of good business is to do everything 
in order. It is better to plan carefully every step 
in advance, so that you will know just when your 
energies will be required for the next step. An 
eminent engineer, on one occasion, in answer to a 
question as to why he was always prepared for an 
emergency, laid down this rule: Whenever you 
have a problem to solve, work it out in more ways 
than one. If one fails, you can apply the other 
immediately. This can be done without a mo- 
ment’s delay. Therein lies the answer — prepared 
ness.” 

The boys readily saw the force of the lesson. 
From that time on it was not necessary to direct 
the order of events. Each saw to it that the part 
allotted to him was carried out in a determined 
spirit. 


CHAPTER IV 


THE TEKRIBLE MONSOONS 

Of the two most urgent articles, namely, 
weapons or the boat, it was decided that the guns 
should be completed first. The feeling that the 
time would come when a visit from the savages 
might be expected at their home, contributed to 
this decision. 

Six barrels, each eighteen inches long, and with 
a bore three-eighths of an inch in diameter, had 
been turned out, and several of the stocks had been 
made at odd times during the evenings. As Harry 
had sufficient steel left for four barrels more, two 
days were devoted to boring them out, in the hope 
that they would ultimately be able to finish them 
up. They would then have a battery of ten guns, 
and the necessity of having a number arose from 
the fact that they were muzzle-loaders, and could 
not be reloaded rapidly. 

A sketch of the gun with the firing mechanism 
is furnished, in which it will be seen that the firing 
plug travels in a bore formed through the stock; 
in a line with the barrel. This plug had an up- 
wardly extending finger, so it could be drawn 
back against the resistance of the spring. Below 
the plug was a trigger, with a hook-shaped forward 
end, in such a position that when the plug was 
drawn back the hook would catch and hold the 
plug until the lower right-angled projection of the 
trigger was pulled back. This would release the 
47 


48 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 

plug, and the spring would then be driven forward 
and explode the cap. 

“It would be well,” said the Professor, “to pol- 
ish the inside of the bored barrels, and thus make 
a much better weapon.” 

“How can we do this?” asked Harry. 

“There are several ways, but the better plan 
would be to take a good polishing material, in the 
form of a fine sand or grit, and mix it with oil. 
This can then be put on a wiper which will snugly 
fit the bore, and the barrel may then be put in the 



The First Gun 


lathe and rotated at a high rate of speed with the 
wiper in the bore, and during the rotation the 
wiper is drawn in and out. This operation should 
be continued for an hour at least, frequently with- 
drawing it to add more of the polishing grit.” 

“What is the best grit to use?” 

“If we can find a sample of the adamantine 
spar, in sufficient quantities, it would be the best 
substance.” 

“What kind of material is that?” 

“It is a substance known as corundum.” 

“Is that the same as emery?” 

“What is known as emery is the more or less 
impure product from the same source. I think I 


THE TEEEIBLE MONSOONS 


49 


have stated heretofore that both of these products 
come from the precious gems ; the blue variety is 
known under the name of sapphire; the red as 
ruby; the yellow as oriental topaz, and the violet 
as oriental amethyst.” 

During that and the following day the Professor 
spent some time in prospecting for the gems, but 
if he succeeded in finding any samples he did not 
make the discovery known. 

A few days after this Harry announced that he 
was ready to lay the keel of the new boat. All 
the material had been prepared, and was at the 
beach. Prior to this the island had been visited 
by a heavy storm. They had been frequent within 
the past month, but this was not considered un- 
usual. 

The Professor insisted that a temporary shed 
should be erected to cover the material, as mois- 
ture would make it very undesirable for the ves- 
sel, and a day was occupied in putting up the 
structure. 

An entire week thus passed, every hour of which 
was devoted with the utmost diligence to the vari- 
ous enterprises. The keel was laid and the work 
of putting on the bottom boards was progressing 
rapidly. One night, a few days after the laying 
of the keel, a brisk wind sprang up, which con- 
tinued during the night, increasing in fury, and 
in the morning evidences were seen on all sides 
of the effect of the tempest. 

^Tt seems very singular,” was George^s obser- 
vation, ^^that we should have such terrible winds 
here.” 

The Professor had evidently expected the 


50 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


storms. you remember the experience we 

bad less than a year ago? We bad five days of 
tbis on tbe ocean.” 

'T bad forgotten that. Do they occur every 
year?” 

• ‘‘You may bave beard of tbe monsoons, a period- 
ical wind in tbe Indian Ocean, wbicb is a northeast 
wind, and they blow with greater or less force 
from November to March.” 

“What causes them to blow with such regularity 
during those periods?” 

“Ab ! that is one of tbe things wbicb it has been 
difficult to determine. They appear to be modifi- 
cations of the trade winds. While, as stated, tbe 
northeast winds blow during tbe periods men- 
tioned, they have tbe southwest monsoons, which 
blow from April to October. As these violent 
winds are the most tempestuous during the period 
when the sun crosses the equator, it has been ar- 
gued that it is due to the action of the sun being 
in such a position that its rays strike the earth 
in the center of its rotation, thus heating up the 
air and causing it to rise rapidly along the middle 
belt.” 

“Is that what we understand by the equinoctial 
storms ?” 

“The equinoctial storms come in March and 
September, when the days and nights are of equal 
length.” 

“I was told by a teacher that the summers are 
longer north of the equator than south of it; is 
that true?” 

“Yes ; the summer north of the equator is about 
seven and a half days longer.” 


THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS 


51 


“What is the cause of thatf^ 

“The earth is at its greatest distance from the 
sun during the summer months, and the angular 
motion of the earth in its orbit is slower. The 
result is, that the interval from the March to 
the September equinoxes is greater than from Sep- 
tember to March.” 

Harry made his way through the violent wind 
and rain to the boat shed. He came back with a 
sorry-looking countenance. “I am afraid every- 
thing is soaked beyond recovery.” He was almost 
on the verge of tears. 

Before noon the rain abated somewhat, but the 
winds still blew strongly, and when they ventured 
out to take stock of their surroundings, George 
was the first to notice the disappearance of the flag 
on Observation Hill. Rushing in to the Profes- 
sor, he cried : “Our flag is gone.” 

Harry was at the boathouse, and when George 
went down to inform him of the new calamity, he 
was almost heart-broken. The Professor, how- 
ever, was not in the least perturbed. He laugh- 
ingly chided them and soon restored the boys to 
their usual gay and happy demeanor. 

“Such little incidents as we have met with this 
morning only give us variety. We need some- 
thing of this kind to add zest to life. J ust ima^ne 
what life would be if everything turned out just 
as you wanted it or willed it? You would commit 
suicide within a week.” 

The boys smiled, but at the same time their eye- 
lids did double duty in the blinking line for a little 
while. 

George straightened himself out and looked up 


52 MYSTEEIES OP THE CAVEENS 


the hill. ^‘Well, I am going for that flag whether 
it blows or not,” and he started for the hill. An- 
gel, who was in the loft, swung down and made 
his way out of the door, and before George had 
gone fifty feet, was at his heels. “And you are 
going, too? Good boy!” and George actually 
hugged Angel. He understood. 

Arriving at the hill he made an examination, 
and found that the halliards had been broken and 
the wind carried away the flag, halliards and all. 
As the wind came from the sea, the flag must be 
inland somewhere. Search was made in every di- 
rection, but to no purpose. Every rock and lodg- 
ing place was examined, but it had disappeared. 
Angel was an interested searcher. He really 
seemed to divine George’s mission. At every 
bush, or rock, or other possible landing place, he 
would be the first, and peer around, and look up 
and down, just as he had seen George do. 

The quest kept up for over an hour, and, sadly 
disappointed, he returned with the news of his 
failure. The Professor took the loss lightly. “I 
presume it is intended that we should work out 
our own rescue. After all, I think that is the 
proper thing to do. If we depend on others we 
are sure to meet with disappointment and failure. 
Cheer up, boys ; flag or no flag, let us do our duty.” 

“I don’t mind the loss of the flag so much because 
ft prevents us from having a signal, but I hate to 
think that we lost so much good time in making 
and putting it up.” 

The flag alluded to was sixteen feet long, labori- 
ously made out of ramie fiber, which was woven, 
and then dyed, and it was a hard task to haul the 


THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS 


53 


pole, which was over fifty feet long, from the for- 
est ten miles away, to say nothing of the labor re- 
quired to raise it. 

As soon as the thoroughly drenched material 
at the boathouse could be brought out and dried in 
the sun, which now came out bright and warm, 
the work proceeded with renewed vigor. Late 
that evening the Professor appeared at the rear 
of the laboratory, and called loudly to the boys. 

When they appeared at the laboratory he was 
laughing immoderately, and Angel stood on one 
of the tables with a simian grin. 

^‘What is the matter? Has Angel been experi- 
menting again?” 

Before the Professor could answer, George 
caught sight of the flag. 

‘‘What! The flag! WTiere did you get it?” 

“Ask Angel.” 

The boys laughed, and George actually hugged 
the animal, in his delight. Did Angel know what 
he had done ? Ask those delvers into the mysteri- 
ous realms of thought, what prompted him to 
search for and restore the flag? Is that any more 
remarkable than the recorded tricks of dogs and 
many other animals? 

You know just how boys can laugh when they 
are really happy. Angel imitated that laugh, and 
he had not been taught to do it, either. It came 
without teaching. 

WLen the Professor had wiped away some of 
the tears which had come from the excess of 
laughter at the imitating efforts of the animal, he 
said: 

“Did it ever occur to you why Angel has always 


54 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


had a solemn look? The facial expression seldom, 
if ever, changes, and they rarely ever exhibit 
mirth. You may imagine the condition of those 
animals, living in the forests, with enemies all 
about them, and the struggle for existence an 
everlasting one. They have never known amus- 
ing incidents as we understand them. Naturally, 
the muscles of mobility in the face, which express 
pleasure, never have been exercised, and those in- 
dicating fear and anger unduly developed. Here 
is Angel, in a new atmosphere, where he sees de- 
light depicted on the countenance, and, gifted as 
he is, with wonderful powers of imitation, has 
learned to actually laugh, and to enjoy the scene.” 

‘‘Well, Professor, as we have one of the guns 
polished up and completed, wouldn’t it be well to 
make the bullets?” 

“For that purpose I suggest that we make the 
molds out of a metal or alloy which has a higher 
fusing point than lead.” 

“What is best for the purpose?” 

“We might make an alloy of copper and zinc.” 

“Oh! You mean brass?” 

“Yes; that is readily cast and easily worked.” 

“But what shape shall we make the bullets?” 

“They should be made long, with a pointed for- 
ward end.” 

“Why is a long bullet better than a round or 
globe-shaped ball?” 

“There are several very important reasons. 
First, momentum is a prime element in a missile. 
A long one contains double the metal of a spherical 
one. Second, it can be made so that it will ex- 


THE TEREIBLE MONSOONS 55 

pand when the explosion of the powder takes 
place.” 

^Tn what way does it expand?” 

^‘Yon have noticed that the rear end of the bullet 
has a cavity. When the explosion takes place the 
thin shell at the rear end of the bullet expands, so 
that it tightly hugs the bore of the gun.” 

^^What is the object of having it do that?” 

“To give the ball the benefit of the charge of 
powder exploded. If it does not fit tightly in the 
bore, more or less of the powder will pass the ball, 
and thus the ball loses part of its force.” 

“What is the object of rifling the gun?” 

“The object is to impart to the bullet a spiral 
motion, as it moves through the air. Metals have 
not the same density on all sides and this is par- 
ticularly true of molded balls. As a result, when 
projected from the gun, the heaviest side has a 
tendency to divert the ball and make it more or 
less erratic in its motion, and, therefore, inac- 
curate. The spiral motion has the effect of min- 
imizing this difficulty. The cavity formed at the 
rear of the projectile was devised particularly to 
cause the thin lip of the bullet to be driven into 
the grooves formed in the gun barrel, and by that 
means the boring motion was transmitted to the 
bullet.” 

“But as we have no means of rifling our guns, 
there will be no necessity of putting the cavity in 
the rear end of our bullets.” 

“We must have the cavity there, by all means.” 

“lYliat for?” 

“Simply because we do not want the bullet to 


56 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 

turn around and travel end over end after it leaves 
the gun.’’ 

“How does the cavity prevent this f ’ 

“You have probably forgotten that a body 
travels through the air with its heaviest end fore- 
most. When a cavity is made it is lighter at that 
end. Without the cavity, if the forward end is 
pointed, it will, on leaving the gun, turn around 
and go through the air with the blunt end fore- 
most.” 

The molds were made, as directed, of a hard 
brass composition, and when they were ready 
to cast them the Professor cautioned against mak- 
ing any castings with the molds in any position 
except upright, so that any inequality in tl;e den- 
sity of the metal .would not form itself on the side 
of the cast article. 

Quite a time had now elapsed since the last 
exploration of the cave beyond Observation Hill. 
The Professor had spoken about it on several 
occasions. For some reason he was intensely in- 
terested in doing that. In fact, he appeared to 
be more concerned about that than any other of 
the unknown things about the island. 

The boys could not understand this peculiarity. 
He had never been questioned on the subject 
directly, but it was evident he had a reason for 
this predominating wish to continue the explora- 
tion. 

George was just as much interested, but, as the 
sequel will show, for an entirely different reason. 
Ever restless, and always willing to undertake 
anything which promised to delve into hidden 


THE TEKRIBLE MONSOONS 


57 


things, he approached the Professor one day with 
the suggestion about the cave. 

think we ought to take one day off and go to 
the cave.” 

The Professor was interested at once. “It will 
not do to attempt it now.” 

“And why not?” 

“I am afraid we could not get in very far, 
unless we had a boat.” 

“Then why not use our lifeboat?” 

This suggestion met with instant favor, 
“True, I had forgotten about that.” 



The Bullet 


It did not take George long to reach Harry with 
the news that the cave was to be explored by means 
of the boat. After considering the matter for 
some time it was decided to put olf the trip for 
several days at least, principally because the late 
heavy rains had, in all probability, so filled the 
cave that they might be stopped in their progress 
before going very far. 

It should be stated that when they entered the 
cave the first time, water was found about two 
hundred feet from its mouth and that barred their 
further progress. On the second trip the water 
had receded, so they could go in six hundred feet 


58 MYSTEEIES OF THE CA VEENS 


before coming to the water’s edge. The late rains 
may have filled the cavities, thus making progress 
still more difficult. 

Harry was carrying forward the boat construc- 
tion, and by the occasional aid of George was 
bringing the hull to a completed state. While 
this was being done, George was at work with 
the loom, slowly weaving out the fabric for the 



sails. As the mast had been stepped back over 
six feet from the prow, it was concluded to make 
a mainsail and a jib, a small triangular sail which 
is attached to the forwardly projecting jib-boom. 
The two sails would afford greater speed than a 
single sail, and that was one consideration. The 
other was, that with two sails the mast would not 
need to be so long, and the dimension of the main- 
sail ^ could be reduced, and still get the same 
efficiency. 


THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS 


59 


The weaving of a large sail in one piece was 
impossible, as the loom conld turn out goods only 
thirty inches wide, and as it could be operated 
by hand power solely, it will be seen that the sails 
required not only time, but an immense amount 
of patience. It is no wonder that George was 
anxious to take a day otf at the cave, or anywhere 
else that afforded a change. 

While at work Angel was his constant com- 
panion. It is remarkable what a degree of friend- 
ship and companionship grew up between the two. 
In the course of time the weaving process became 
so familiar to Angel that whenever George would 
throw the bobbin, containing the weft, through the 
opening of the woof threads, the animal stood 
ready to pull the heddles forward, so as to force 
the last weft thread up against the one previously 
threaded across. 


CHAPTER V 


THE VOYAGE FOE THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE 
DISCOVEKY 

Within the next week the boat hull was prac- 
tically completed, and now needed caulking. F or 
this purpose the hemp, which had been found, as 
previously stated, was broken up, and as much of 
the woody portions removed as could be taken 
out, so as to make it available for filling in the 
crevices between the planking. 

The mast was stepped in, and a sufficient quan- 
tity of manilla rope twisted for the sails, and also 
a supply put aboard for other needs. The sails 
were not yet completed, but they would doubtless 
be ready by the time the other parts were. 

In one of their evening conferences George ex- 
pressed his concern about the future of Angel. 

“For my part I do not want to leave him be- 
hind.’’ 

“Then why not take him with usf’ asked the 
Professor. 

Harry had some doubts on this point, but George 
was too insistent to brook any thought of leaving 
him behind. 

“I make this suggestion, George: Before the 
time of sailing it would be advisable for you to 
make several trips with Angel in the small boat, 
and see how he behaves. In some respects he 
would be an acquisition to us.” 

The boys had not forgotten how the animal, 
60 


THE VOYAGE 


61 


during their various trips, had been of material 
assistance, nor the times when nutting how Angel 
understood what they were after, and would 
climb trees and shower them down, and then 
gravely help to load them into the wagon; and 
they remembered the recovery of the flag. Such 
service was appreciated. 

As it was, Angel was invited to take a sail. The 
lifeboat recovered in South Eiver had been named 
No. 2, as they insisted on calling their own wrecked 
vessel No. 1. 

No. 2 was launched. A small sail had been 
rigged up, and two good oars provided for it. An- 
gel was completely at the command of George, 
and when he was called and taken down to the 
landing in front of the boathouse, he went without 
any hesitancy. But to induce him to enter the 
boat was another matter. 

Suspecting there would be some difficulty, 
George pulled a small jar of honey from his 
pocket, and silently began to eat it. Angel’s eyes 
blinked. It was such an unheard of thing for 
George to do this without extending an invitation 
to join. He shambled over, but George walked 
to the boat and sat down in it, not appearing to 
notice the eager look on the animal’s face. 

Without further urging he stepped aboard, and 
George put his arm around him, as Harry, with 
oar in hand, pushed the boat from the shore. An- 
gel was startled, and tried to get away, but sooth- 
ing words soon quieted him, and before they 
reached the mouth of the Cataract he was leaning 
over the gunwale and playing with the water in 
the most aporov^d ]’>ov-]ike fashion. 


62 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


When, however, they had passed the compara- 
tively calm waters in the estuary, and were round- 
ing the cliffs, poor Angel forgot his sport, and 
sat as one paralyzed, gazing at the sight of the 
waves heating against the shore line. George 
went up to him, and spoke encouragingly, and it 
was fully a half hour before he was restored to 
his usual calm. Then, apparently, he noticed for 
the first time the peculiar rocking motion of the 
vessel. Every time it swayed to the right or to 
the left he would give that peculiar chuckle which 
always indicated delight. 

They went around the point to the east, and 
passed down the coast in a southerly direction, 
going as far as the cape north and east of the 
mouth of South River. 

^^Steer for the shore, George; steer for the 
shore; what is that to the right!” said Harry, 
pointing to the beach. 

^Tt looks like a boat, sure enough.” 

As the wind was coming directly from the shore 
they had to depend on the oars to bring the vessel 
around, and as they came in could distinctly make 
out the side of a boat lying among debris, in an 
inclined position, against a rather steep beach. 

^Tt is our boat, Harry.” The moment their ves- 
sel came alongside, Angel jumped off and leaped 
over to the boat on the shore. Evidently he also 
had recognized it. 

“Well, isn’t this a find!” 

“How long do you suppose this has been here ! 
I am glad we gave Angel an outing.” 

“Shall we take it with us !” 


THE VOYAGE 63 

^‘Yes; if we have to carry it overland,” was 
Harry^s reply. 

^‘Let us float it.” 

It was not much of a task to do this, and with 
a short rope it was hitched to the stern of No. 2. 
Angel remained in the recovered boat, and when 
No. 2 was pushed from the shore, and the sail set, 
its movement did not seem to perturb him in the 
least, but when the oscillations again began to be 
perceptible, he commenced to gurgle, and George 
knew they had a good sailor to take with them. 

The sail took a little over three hours, and as 
they passed up the Cataract Eiver, and approached 
their home, the boys set up a welcoming shriek, 
in imitation of incoming steamers, which so de- 
lighted Angel that he scampered in a delirium of 
joy from one end of the craft to the other. It is 
doubtful whether he had ever in his short life had 
such a glorious time, and that he remembered it 
his subsequent history furnishes the best evidence. 

The Professor was just as much delighted as 
the boys at the sight of their first marine produc- 
tion, which had gotten away from them and 
stranded them on the cliffs three months before. 

am sorry now that you named the other boats, 
because this is really No. 1.” 

^‘Never mind ; this is good enough to be No. 3. 
Just look at our navy !” 

‘AVhere did you find it!” 

^^Near the point, south of the bay.” 

‘‘Then it must have been washed there during 
the late storms, because I do not think it is possi- 
ble that it could have gone there at the time it 


64 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


escaped you, as the wind was blowing directly to 
the west at that time.” 

The boys now remembered the circumstance, and 
as they recalled the condition of the driftwood 
around it when they found it on the beach, it was 
plain that the storm had been their friend in this 
case. 

“Have you been using oars on the boat!” was the 
Professor^s inquiry, as he bent over the side and 
examined the notches which were made for the 
oars. 

“No ; why do you ask?” 

“This boat has been used by some one, and not 
very long ago, at that. Notice how the forward 
sides of these notches are worn. It also seems 
that civilized people have been using the boat.” 

The information was so startling that neither 
of the boys could answer for a moment. Did they 
have another mystery to contend with? 

But George was alert on the questioning end 
of any proposition. “Do you really think white 
people have had the boat ? I do not see anything 
that would make you think so.” 

“If they were savages they wouldnT use the oar- 
locks or notches, as they row free-hand, almost 
without exception ; but get a white man in a boat, 
and the first thing he looks for is a place to put 
his oars in. This incident in itself shows one of 
the distinguishing features between the civilized 
and the uncivilized people.” 

“In what way is one civilized and the other 
not?” y 

“I did not say one was civilized and the other 
uncivilized. The most wonderful thing in the ad- 


THE VOYAGE 


65 


vancement of the human race from a state of sav- 
agery to civilization, was the discovery and utiliza- 
tion of a fulcrum. Whenever man, in an advanced 
state, undertakes to do anything, he uses a ful- 
crum of some kind.” 

“In what way is it so useful?” 

“Primarily, in the form of a wedge, a pulley, 
a wheel and axle, an inclined plane, a screw or a 
lever. All these forms do the same thing as the 
simple lever; and what sort of mechanism could 
be made without some of these elements? The 
row-lock is simply the fulcrum for the oar, is it 
not ? • When Archimedes discovered the princi- 
ples of the lever, he was so excited that he de- 
clared he could move the earth if he could find a 
fulcrum.” 

A careful examination of the notched gunwale 
showed conclusively that it had been used to a 
considerable extent. George sat and pondered 
over this. “I am sure *we never used the boat 
enough with the oars to wear it in this way. 
Had you examined this when you said that the 
boat had not been long at the point where we 
found it?” 

“No,” answered the Professor; “I simply re- 
membered that on the day you lost it the wind 
was blowing to the west, and as you found it to 
the east of the clitfs, I inferred it must have been 
carried around since that time.” 

“It is evident then that the people who used 
this boat live to the west of us?” 

“That is my only conclusion.” 

“Then you think the fire in the forest, and the 


66 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


light which we saw that night beyond the West 
River, were made by those people f’ 

‘T am sure the fire we saw was made by sav- 
ages, but I am not so certain about the lights 
having been made by them.” 

Harry looked at the Professor, and then at 
George, and slowly shook his head. Wasn’t it 
lucky we didn’t meet them when we made our trip 
to the river?” 

That evening the inevitable subject of their 
forthcoming voyage was again discussed, and to 
the surprise of the boys, the Professor urged de- 
lay. His reasons were expressed as follows: 

^While we have had some very severe storms of 
the kind which may be expected, we are not sure 
that the weather is yet fully settled. That is the 
only reason I urge delay. If, on the other hand, 
we should decide to take an overland journey, we 
could set out at once.” 

Harry was opposed to taking another trip by 
land. “We have really found out more by the 
water route than going by land. For that reason 
it would be well for us to make at least one adven- 
ture by sea.” 

These arguments prevailed in the minds of all, 
and while it would take some time before all prep- 
arations could be made, all were happy at the 
thought that when they did undertake the journey 
something definite would be learned to clear up a 
few of the mysteries of Wonder Island. 

The Professor did find some samples of tour- 
maline, in a finely divided state, and this gem was 
used to polish the gun barrels, so that all the 
weapons were finally put into condition where 


THE VOYAGE 


67 


they could be used. During an hour each day 
all took a part in practicing in a range specially 
prepared near the workshop. Distances were laid 
off accurately, and the regulation targets set up. 
In this manner they became accustomed to loading 
and firing with facility and a considerable degree 
of accuracy. 

If anyone, not knowing the situation, had 
dropped in on this scene, he would have consid- 
ered himself in the midst of a great naval and 
military camp. At the workshop were the guns, 
arranged in order; boxes provided for the bul- 
lets; small turned out wooden cups for powder, 
each cup carrying twenty little tubes of bamboo, 
each with a measured charge of powder, and 
longer bamboo tubes with percussion caps in them. 

It was Harry’s brilliant idea to separate each 
charge of powder and put it into a special tube. 
This tube had one end closed, and the other pro- 
vided with a stopper, so that in loading the stop- 
per could be drawn out and held by the teeth 
while the powder was poured into the gun. The 
caps were put into a bamboo tube which was just 
large enough to take the caps, which were dropped 
in, one after the other, and it can be seen that it 
would be an easy matter to turn the tube upside 
down, and thus bring out one cap at a time. This 
also facilitated the reloading of the gun. 

During the practice with the gun one serious 
defect was found ; and that was to remove the cap 
after each shot. Sometimes the body of the cap 
would not split, and as a result, a knife or some 
pointed instrument would have to be employed to 
dislodge it so as to make room for the new cap. 


68 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Harry found a way to remedy this. An open- 
ing was made through the stock at one side, and a 
sliding piece, like a collar, put over the nipple 
which holds the cap. A finger attached to this 
collar enabled the marksman to draw back the 
collar, and this would bring with it the cap, which 
would then fall out of the side opening. 

All these little details may seem to be useless 
care, but rapidity in loading and firing, with muz- 
zle-loaders, in an engagement might be their sal- 
vation. 

A test was made of the improved firearm, to 
determine how fast the gun could be loaded and 
fired. The test made by Harry showed that it 
took two seconds, after a shot, to bring down the 
piece, and draw back the collar to release the cap ; 
three seconds to grasp one of the powder tubes, 
remove the stopper and bring it to the muzzle of 
the gun ; two seconds to pour in the powder ; two 
seconds to drop the tube in its receptacle and grasp 
the bullet ; two seconds to ram it home, and three 
seconds to put on the cap and cock the gun for 
firing. That was nearly a quarter of a minute. 

He was very much dissatisfied with this exhibi- 
tion of speed — or rather of slowness, so after con- 
sidering the matter for some time, hit upon the 
plan of reducing the rear end of the bullet, so he 
could wrap a paper tube on that and tie it. Then 
he purposed filling the tube with powder, and 
closing the rear end by folding over the end of 
the tube. In this way he would entirely over- 
come the need of the little bamboo tubes for hold- 
ing the powder. 

But no paper was available, nor could he think 


THE VOYAGE 69 

of anything which could be used as a substitute. 
In despair he repaired to the Professor. 

‘‘What is the difficulty now?” said the Professor, 
with a smile. 

“No difficulty, particularly, but I wish we could 
have paper, or something like it. I want to make 
cartridges.” 

“I thought you had all that arranged for?” 

“So I did, but it takes me a quarter of a minute 
to load, and I must do better than that.” 

He mused a while. “We could make paper, and 
I think we have the facilities at hand for doing 
it ; but it will take quite a time to arrange for it. 
Aside from that I do not, at this moment, know of 
anything which will be a fair substitute.” 

He was chagrined at this failure. But, after 
all, four shots a minute were not so bad. The 
perfection of the guns must await their return. 

Now, let us go down to the marine works, on 
the shore below the Cataract. Here were the 
three vessels lined up side by side, and also the 
after part of the lifeboat. The shed, which was 
the boathouse, had nearly all their tools, and be- 
sides the bench, was a forge and the primitive 
blower which the Professor and George had made 
and set up. Wood, parts of planks, thin boards, 
of all sorts and description, were scattered about. 
It looked business-like, and Harry was intensely 
proud of it. 

The sail was completed, and taken down to be 
bent on the cable. The jib had already been in- 
stalled in place, and when the sails were hoisted 
and they walked out from the shore and glanced 
back to get a full view, the entire Naval Bureau 


70 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


congratulated itself on the magnificent appear- 
ance of the fleet, and particularly of the new cre- 
ation in maritime architecture. 

It is not out of place to say that the Professor 
and George both showered the highest compli- 
ments on Harry, for he deserved it. But the 
officials of the establishment were not the only ones 
to admire the fine sight. Angel came, and he took 
it in. It was the finest climbing he had enjoyed 
in many a day. The Professor took off his hat. 
‘T propose three cheers for our ship.” 

They were given, and with each cheer the hats 
circled their heads. This was a new code of pro- 
cedure to Angel. He couldn’t understand it. 
Without waiting for explanations, he shot down 
the mast, and landed on shore. It was the most 
comical proceeding they had ever witnessed on his 
part, and when he looked at the group, and then 
at the ship, he said as plainly as though he had 
uttered it: ‘^What does all this mean?” 

When the laughter was over, George proposed 
three cheers for Angel. The hats came off and 
the cheers were given. Then the same smile 
which he had so well learned illuminated his pro- 
jecting face, and he swung his long arm around 
as he had seen it done, and another step had been 
taken in his education. 


CHAPTER VI 

THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE 

Another week had thus passed by — seven days 
of unceasing toil. The Professor again brought 
up the subject of the cave. The subject did not 
need any argument. It fell on willing ears. 

^‘How shall we take the boat around was the 
matter which interested George. 

^^Sail it around, of course,” was Harry’s view. 

Both looked at the Professor. ^Tf we sail it 
there, which will be an easy matter, how can we 
haul it up the sides of the cliffs? From my pres- 
ent recollection the mouth of the cave is fully 
thirty feet or more from the water line. The air 
pocket is not over eight or ten feet. At any rate, 
it is much lower.” 

‘^Then why not haul it around on the wagon, 
and lower it down the walls?” 

^^That seems the most feasible plan.” 

They now knew what preparations were needed 
for the exploration. Two lamps had been taken 
before, and one was lost in the cave. Since that 
several more had been made, so that three were 
provided, together with a supply of matches. 

When the wagon was ready the Professor 
brought out several boards, and deposited them in 
the wagon. The boys looked at the boards in- 
quiringly, as the Professor turned back from the 
wagon. ^‘Oh, yes, the boards ; we want something 
71 


72 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 

to write on so that we can chart the cave. We 
must not be caught as we were the last time.” 

“But how can we possibly chart the cave when 
we have only one boat?” And George laughed 
at the idea of making a plan of the interior by 
standing at one point. 

“You measured the height of the falls without 
going to the top, if you will remember.” 

He had forgotten that. But the boat was at 
last secured in the wagon, and proceeded to the 
clilfs. It was fortunate that the team could be 
taken to a point directly over the mouth of the 
cave, and in a little while the ropes were attached 
to it and slowly lowered, Harry taking the pre- 
caution to follow it down and to dislodge it from 
the steps which appeared in its path. 

The team was then securely hitched, and taking 
all their implements, such as lamps and boards, 
together with two of the guns and an ample supply 
of ammunition, descended to the entrance. The 
boat was at the mouth, and it was suggested that 
a preliminary survey of the interior should first 
be made, in order to ascertain how far the boat 
would have to be carried before reaching the 
water. 

The lamps were lighted, and the boys led the 
way. After passing the point, about two hun- 
dred feet from the mouth, and at almost the iden- 
tical spot where the water was found at the first 
exploration, the water glistened before them. Ee- 
turning toward the opening a loud beating sound 
was heard, which at first startled them. It was 
evidently at the mouth of the cave. It sounded 


THE GEUESOME FINDS 73 

like the beating of a stick against some hard 
substance. 

The nearer they came to daylight, the more dis- 
tinct were the sounds. As heretofore explained, 
near the entrance the cave made a turn to the 
right at an angle, so that when at a distance of 
fifty feet from the opening it was impossible to 
see daylight, except what little was diffracted 
from the angle at the turn. 

This angle was reached, and the beating, rather 
irregular, was plain enough to cause some alarm. 
The boat was beyond the open mouth and at one 
side, so that it could not be seen by anyone within 
the recessed walls. 

All stood still, while the beatings continued. 
Occasionally there would be a cessation, to be 
repeated again. Whatever it was it was not far 
away. The Professor whispered : ^^Get the guns 
ready; we must take some chances.” 

Cautiously the company moved forward; the 
end of the boat first appeared in sight, and as 
George peered beyond the projecting point of the 
ledge, he threw up his hands and burst out in 
laughter. Angel was in the boat, imitating 
Harry in the building operation. The sudden ap- 
pearance did not startle him in the least, nor did 
ne stop beating his lullaby, after he noticed the 
broad smiles that greeted him. 

With an eye to every advantage, Harry had 
attached to the sides of the boat, amidships, two 
short standards, about three feet high, on top of 
which two of the lamps were mounted, so they 
would be out of the way, and thus give them free- 
dom to handle the oars and the weapons, as well 


74 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

as afford them a better light, than if carried by 
hand. The Professor was much pleased with this 
arrangement. 

The boat was not particularly heavy, but it was 
a task to drag it over the uneven floor and along 
the tortuous path which had to be taken by their 
burden, but when the water was reached they were 
repaid for the labor by the ease with which they 
could explore the interior. 

Before starting the journey the Professor, as 
usual, uttered a few words of advice: ‘‘One of 
us must sit in the bow, one at the stern, and the 
other amidships. The one at the stern must propel 
the boat, as we cannot row through many of the 
places, and as the water is not deep, that will not 
be a difficult task. The ones at the bow and amid- 
ships should have the guns, and if there is no ob- 
jection, I will take my place on the middle seat, 
where I can best take the observations on the way. 
The other places you should decide between your- 
selves.” 

“I am willing to take the bow, if Harry agrees.” 
Harry sanctioned the arrangement, and when the 
lamps were securely fastened, Harry pushed the 
boat forward through the cavern. It did not take 
long to reach the slight turn which led to the large 
chamber, which was over one hundred feet long. 

On the way to the chamber Harry had an op- 
portunity to measure the depths of the water, 
and at intervals the Professor would call out for 
the depths, as he was making notes of the descent 
formed by the floor to the chamber. The oars 
gave a pretty fair idea, showing that the floor 


THE GEUESOME FINDS 75 

was only about five feet lower at the chamber than 
where the boat was launched. 

Beaching the chamber Harry was directed to 
steer it to the right and skirt the wall going to 
the left, so that every part of it could be exam- 
ined. 





The Treasure Cave 

‘T have another reason for this careful examina- 
tion,” remarked the Professor, as he was intently 
engaged in making notes on the board tablets. It 
may be likely that the chamber has more than one 
outlet, and if so, we must explore it also. Of 



76 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


course, I am most interested in the outlet to the 
south.” 

A circuit was made until they reached the outlet 
to the south, which Harry had discovered when 
the light on the ledge disappeared. The water 
throughout the cavern within the chamber was 
not over eight feet deep, and at the outlet to the 
south he could not touch bottom with the twelve- 
foot pole they carried. This outlet was con- 
tracted, and, judging from the width of the boat, 
could not be more than eight feet across, but it 
gradually widened, and the waters became shal- 
lower as they advanced. 

George, who was in the bow, held up his hand 
as a warning. “Stop!” was all he said. All 
peered forward. The lights threw their beams 
forwardly through a broadening channel, beyond 
which appeared to be white forms ranged along 
the opposite wall. 

“What depth have you, Harry I” asked the Pro- 
fessor, without seeming at all concerned. 

“About five feet.” 

“Move straight ahead, until I tell you to stop.” 

The pole was thrust down and the boat moved 
forwardly fully fifty feet before a halt was called. 

“I think we are now in the middle of this cham- 
ber. Before exploring it let us make a thorough 
examination of its characteristics.” 

“Look at those wonderful icicles hanging from 
the roof!” George gazed on them with wonder 
and admiration. Harry, on the other hand, with 
the utilitarian idea in his mind, inquired: “Why 
couldn’t all that chalk be utilized for making 
plaster?” 


THE GEUESOME FINDS 


77 


“That product is used in the arts, but it costs 
too much to transport it from the places where it 
is found in its natural state, as science has found 
a much cheaper way of producing it from lime- 
stone.” 

“Are all these rocks limestone?” 

“Beyond question. Only a few of the caves so 
far found are in any other formation than lime- 
stone.” 

“What kind of cave are those?” 

“Where they have been produced by volcanic 
action. There the walls are of volcanic rock.” 

“Why is it that these underground channels are 
formed in this way?” 

“They are formed by the erosive action of the 
water wearing out the softer portions of the rock 
beneath a harder roof or wall. This action is 
brought about by carbonic acid acting on the 
rock and producing what is called carbonate of 
lime, and the stalactites and stalagmites found 
in all these caverns are of that material.” 

“What is the difference between the two names 
you have just mentioned?” 

“Stalactite means trickling or dropping, and as 
applied to these formations it means conical or 
cylindrical accretions of the carbonate. Stalag- 
mite is the term used to designate the calcareous 
formations found on the floors of caverns, which 
are usually the droppings from the roof.” 

“Where are most of the caves found?” 

“They occur most frequently along rocky shores 
of open seas, as in this case. Some of them are 
celebrated for their great extent, others for their 
gorgeous interiors, like this chamber. Some show 


78 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


the most beautiful draperies, or veils; in some 
cases portions of the ceiling have representations 
of magnificent inverted candelabra, and what ap- 
pear to be carvings in the purest white.’^ 

“In what parts of the world are most of them 
found?” 

“It does not seem that any portion of the world 
has a monopoly. The most celebrated are the 
grotto of Antiparas, in Greece ; the Adelsberg cav- 
erns in Camiola, and the Mammoth in Kentucky, 
The latter is the largest in the world, the wind- 
ings of which extend forty miles and through 
which is a subterranean river. In the river are 
eyeless fish, and fish with eyes, but sightless. 
Others are the Luray, in Virginia ; the Wyandotte, 
in Indiana ; Weir’s, in Virginia ; the Big Saltpeter, 
in Missouri, and Ball’s, in New York. Of sea- 
shore caverns, the most famous and remarkable 
is Fingal’s, on the coast of Scotland. Extensive 
caves are also found in the Azores, Canary Is- 
lands, in Iceland, in various*portions of England, 
France and Belgium. Many of them are of im- 
mense value to the paleontologist.” 

“In what way are they of any use?” 

“They have been of the greatest service, be- 
cause in the early days of man, and before he 
knew enough to build his own habitation, he made 
the cave his home. You have heard of the ^cave 
man,’ have you not? During the old stone period 
in England and other European countries, these 
caverns were the only* abodes of man, and in them 
have been found layers from twenty to thirty feet 
thick, of successive accretions of bone, stalagmites 
and various articles of human manufacture.” 


THE GEUESOME FINDS 


79 


This information added interest to the examina- 
tion of the walls, and the eagerness of the boys to 
discover something new and startling was at its 
keenest edge. Before they had made a half cir- 
cuit George announced that he could see a large 
opening, which turned to the right, and thus 
formed a bend to the general direction that the 
cavern had made. 

A digression is necessary, in order to be able 
to understand all the elements in this remarkable 
voyage. The mouth of the cave was northeast of 
the Cataract home, and distant about a half mile, 
in a straight line. The opening for the first six 
hundred feet, which had been charted by them 
on the previous occasion, ran directly south, but 
from that point it turned toward the southwest, 
and this now, in a measure, explained the eager- 
ness of the Professor to explore it, as he believed 
the cavern led to a point near their home. 

^‘There is no water in the opening,’^ was the 
further information from George, as they ap- 
proached the contracted end of the chamber. 

‘‘Before we land let us see the other side of the 
chamber,” was the Professor’s suggestion. 

The boat was veered around to the left, and 
before they had proceeded fifty feet it was ap- 
parent that a similar opening led out to the south, 
and a dry floor was visible, like in the other out- 
let. The boat was landed, and drawn up, two of 
the lamps taken out and the guns examined. The 
opening led into a second chamber, which looked 
like a canopied grotto of marble. Where they 
stood the chamber had the appearance of a huge 
letter A, the side walls of which ran together in 


80 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


the distance, but these walls were broken up by 
the most enchanting series of columns, and deli- 
cate entablatures, and the outlines of the figures 
were like blanched frescoes. It was such a weird 
and startling sight that the boys could not re- 
press their amazement. 

After they had fully entered the chamber 
Harry’s quick eye caught a peculiar formation 
to the right, on a raised sort of platform, behind 
which seemed to be a recess. He had noticed it 
because it contrasted so strangely with the uni- 
formly white glare of all the surrounding sur- 
faces. He quickly made his way across, and as 
he reached it, stepped back in alarm. 

‘^Come here, quickly ; are those skulls and skele- 
tons?” 

The Professor did not need a second invita- 
tion. Scattered about on the elevation were found 
four skulls, and the bones comprising the remains 
of four human beings. The skulls were first ar- 
ranged side by side, and the Professor intently 
examined them. 

^‘These are skulls of the Caucasian race, be- 
yond a doubt. All are, apparently, well formed 
and normal. But what is this ?” 

In the side of one skull was a perforation, with 
the bone fractured on all sides of the orifice. 

“Do you think it is a bullet wound?” 

“It has that appearance. As there seems to be 
no corresponding hole in any other portion of 
the skull, we may be able to find the missile inside, 
if death was caused by that means.” 

Harry had noticed a rattling sound when the 
skull was put in place, and mentioned this. After 


THE GEUESOME FINDS 


81 


some hesitation the course of the fractured open- 
ing was traced through, and embedded near the 
top and on the opposite side, was a large lead 
ball, or what had been, undoubtedly, spherically 
shaped before it entered and passed through the 
bones. 

^‘This is evidence to me that these remains have 
been here a long time.” 

‘^Why; because it is in the form of a ball, and 
not a bullet?” 

‘^Yes; and there is also another reason why 
these people came here and met their fate many, 
many years ago.” 

‘‘What is that?” 

“In this calcareous formation the preservative 
qualities of the carbonates would prevent rapid 
decomposition. These skulls are turning to the 
same material that we see all about us. See how 
brittle the bones are. Our bones are of lime for- 
mation, being largely composed of the carbonate, 
the same as the stalactites.” 

The other substances now lying about were 
noticed. The excitement engendered at the sight 
of the bones was enough temporarily to blind 
them to the numerous things found scattered 
about. Here was a dirk, the edges entirely worn 
away, and whitened. There were the metal ribs of 
what seemed to be a ease, or a receptacle of some 
kind. Lying at one side was an ancient type of 
firearm, long, heavy, and with an immense bore. 
Another and another were found — a regular ar- 
senal, with the scattered remnants of peculiar lit- 
tle copper receptacles with whitish powder in 
them. 


82 MYSTEKIES OF THE CAVEENS 


Harry, who was about to remove the powder, 
was stopped by the Professor. “We must retain 
everything' as we find it, as nearly as possible. 
We do not yet know what the little vessels con- 
tain.” 

Not an article of clothing thus far had been 
found. A little higher up on the platform, two 
more skeletons were seen, both of which had 
fractured skulls, one of them showing two cavities 
which could not have been accidental, as both 
showed the same kind of fracture, and inclined 
across the skull in the same direction on the left 
side. 

Alongside these skeletons were more of the 
long, wicked-looking firearms which had been 
found previously near the other bodies. There 
was every evidence to show that a terrible fight 
had terminated the existence of the band. More 
long knives, with curiously wrought handles, were 
lying behind the last skeletons, and on a more 
careful examination, a knife of an entirely differ- 
ent pattern was found within the ribbed cavity of 
one of them. 

Still farther back, new articles appeared. 
Articles of furniture, many of them coated with 
the fallen carbonates ; and here were the first arti- 
cles of clothing, some of which were so decom- 
posed as to crumble at the touch. Others were 
still firm. Some of the articles, like a mantle, had 
threads intact running in one direction, and the 
other cross thread all converted into dust, which 
disappeared when the garment was held up. 

On some of the garments were metal trimmings. 
“They look like silver,” said George, excitedly; 


THE GRUESOME FINDS 


83 


‘^and what is this*? It seems to be silver,” as he 
brushed a bracelet-like piece of ornamentation 
with the sleeve of his coat. As they advanced 
new articles came in sight; a bench; a veritable 
chair, or couch, the covering of which was there 
merely to give it form, hut the substance had 
gone. Only the wood remained and that largely 
decayed. 

And now on every side, at the rear and along 
the walls of the recess, were evidences of human 
habitation. Cutlasses, knives, and at one side, 
what appeared to be the kitchen, were numerous 
pots and kettles of various sizes and descriptions, 
nearly all of them of copper. 

^‘How could they possibly cook in here without 
being smothered to death?” asked Harry. 

^^The cavern seems to be large enough to take 
care of all the smoke,” was the Professor’s reply. 

‘^Well, I don’t understand why they should have 
taken the trouble to come in such a long distance, 
when they would be just as safe nearer the 
mouth?” 

“Before we leave this place we may be able 
to answer your two questions in a way that will 
surprise, if not startle, you,” was the Professor’s 
answer. 

This vague reply did not detract any from the 
interest which the boys took in the search. 


CHAPTEE Yll 


THE TKEASURES OF THE CAVE 

While Harry was in the act of drawing back 
one of the couches, an object behind it seemed to 
fall apart with a jingling sound. 

‘‘What was that?” exclaimed George. 

“I think we have found something here that will 
make us do some thinking,” answered Harry, as 
he bent down to take up some of the detached 
pieces which came from what now appeared to be 
a large chest. He picked up one of the round 
pieces. “Gold, gold; look at it!” 

“I suspected something of the kind when I saw 
the skeletons. Carefully, boys ; let us remove this 
piece of furniture. Undoubtedly, we are in 
pirates’ lair, and here is the booty.” 

The boys were too much overcome for words. 
They looked at the gold, and then at each other. 
George arose and walked back and forth. Harry, 
with the coin in his hand, brushed it and held it 
close to the light. 

“With this we can buy anything we want,” 
George finally uttered. 

“Whom will you buy it from!” was Harry re- 
ply. The Professor only smiled. Of what use was 
money to them? George had forgotten that. 

“Here is another one.” 

“Another what?” 

“A chest, something like yours.” The lid, with 
its mocking lock, opened easily, and there, coated 
84 


TEEASUEES OF THE CAVE 85 

with the universal carbonate, were a mass of coins, 
articles of ornament, rings, bracelets, and pieces 
the names or uses of which were entirely unknown 
to them. 

‘^Now that we have them, what shall be done 
with the treasures f’ 

The boys did not answer for some time. Here 
was wealth ; more, probably, than either had ever 
dreamed of ; but it was of no earthly use to them. 
They must, of course, preserve it. They had dis- 
covered it, and under all the laws were entitled 
to possession. 

'‘Well, have we gotten together all the gold and 
silver and precious stones? Just imagine us as 
buccaneers ! Owners of an island we havenT con- 
quered, and possessors of a fortune without work- 
ing for it!” and the Professor laughed at the 
thought of it. The boys, too, laughed, but when 
they looked over at the ghastly skeletons, the joy 
was suddenly checked. 

The Professor saw the reason. ^TsnT this a 
sermon? You have become acquainted with it 
early in life; some learn it very late, and others 
never get the lesson. Eiches ; death ! Possessors 
of every material thing that earth can give, and 
the grave beyond it I The unfortunates there had 
all this, but their skeletons have stood guard over 
it for a century or more.” 

The Professor still smiled, but the boys were 
very grave. It was, indeed, an impressive lesson. 

<<'W'hy are you so quiet? Are you mourning 
for them?” Then, without waiting for more 
gloomy feelings, he continued: ^^How high above 
the mouth of the cave do you think we are?” 

This sudden change in the tone of the Professor 


86 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


was almost startling to them. How indifferent! 
It appeared almost like desecration. 

^T have no idea,” was Harry^s faltering reply. 
He looked around to assure himself that it was 
not all a dream. The sudden acquisition of what 
appeared to be an immense store of wealth, the 
ghastly relics below, seemed to stun him. 

^Tlave you a reason for wanting to know how 
high up we are asked George when he had par- 
tially recovered. 

^‘You wanted to know a little while ago how the 
smoke in the cavern might affect them. HavenT 
you noticed a percei3tible movement in the atmos- 
phere since we entered the chamber 

The boys started and stared at him. Could it 
be that the cave had an outlet in the hills? 

^^Was that the reason you suggested we should 
make a circuit around the chamber after we en- 
tered it?” 

^‘Yes; and I know where the outlet is.” 

‘^And does that explain why the pirates made 
their home at this end ?” 

“Undoubtedly; and what will be still more in- 
teresting information is, that the opening is 
within sight of the cataract.” 

Could anything be more exciting than this in- 
formation? 

“I now see the reason why you always wanted 
to come back to the cave. Hid you suspect this 
when we first entered the cave ?” 

“No ; but I had an idea we should find this after 
we made our second trip.” 

“What did you see?” 

“Nothing but what Harry brought te me.” 

“What was that?” both exclaimed, eagerly. 


TEEASUEES OF THE CAVE 87 

^^The slab of carbonate which Harry brought me 
for the marking tablet, and on which we made the 
chart of the cave.” 

‘AVhat did yon find on it?” 

^Tf you will recall, I brought it with me. It 
is now in the boat.” Harry dashed down to the 
boat and brought it back, turning it over and over 
on the way. 

The slab referred to was about two inches thick, 
a foot long, and probably ten inches wide, a little 
irregular in formation. 

“When we returned home that evening, after the 
trip referred to, I took the slab and transferred 
the chart we had made to a board. In doing so, 
I noticed that the lime had been chipped away 
from one side, but that did not cause me to make 
any investigation at the time. 

“Some days afterwards I again took it up, and 
could see plainly through the carbonate what ap- 
peared to be the shadows of some characters, and 
it at once occurred to me that, owing to the sun- 
light and the comparatively dry atmosphere in 
which it had been kept after its removal, that the 
lime would turn or change its color, but the lime 
on this background did not change in the same 
degree where the characters had been placed, and 
when we get into the sunlight you will be able to 
see just what I saw.” 

Looking at the slab, there was nothing to indi- 
cate any characters imprinted in it. 

“Where is the opening, Professor?” 

“Come here ; directly below where we found the 
first skeleton; keep the light back in the recess; 
there; now look to the left and see that small 
streak of light about ten feet from the floor.” 


88 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

George could restrain himself no longer, but 
rushed forward. As he crossed a slightly ele- 
vated obstruction, his foot caught on a spur and 
he pitched forward. Harry, who was following, 
saw him fall. George, slightly stunned, had raised 
himself partly as Harry came up. When Harry 
saw him he was arising from a nest of bones 
which showed the remains of two more pirates, 
the two skulls lying close together, directly be- 
hind the little ridge over which George had fallen. 

‘‘Here are some more of them,” cried Harry, 
as the Professor came up. “What a fight they 
must have had !” 

The outlet at this point was fully eight fee., 
wide, and without the lights it was still too dark 
to distinguish anything. George’s light had been 
extinguished in the fall, but Harry’s lamp was 
still available, and all were eager now to find the 
outlet. Harry now led the way, and within sev- 
enty-five feet, at a pronounced angle in the throat 
of the cave, he recognized the first real glimmer 
of sunlight. 

“See the steps here !” was his cry. And beyond, 
as plainly formed as though cut a year ago, in- 
stead of a century, were steps leading up to a 
contracted opening, partly hidden by shrubbery. 

When Harry emerged from the opening, the 
first sight that met his gaze, after he had fully 
recovered the use of his eyes, was their home, not 
a thousand feet away. George brushed his way 
out, and he stood there, not knowing whether to 
run or to shout or to cry. Every emotion appealed 
to the boys for mastery. All previous experiences 
during the past year paled into insignificance in 


TREASUEES OF THE CAVE 89 

comparison with the hour just spent in the pirates’ 
lair. 

The opening from which they left the cavern 
was on the side of a hill, not particularly steep, 
formed by projecting strata of limestone, in the 
clefts of which vegetation grew, and at a distance 
the rocks could be seen only at intervals on ac- 
count of the shrubbery. No one could possibly 
suspect an opening into the walls anywhere along 
the hillside. The outlet was not more than twenty 
feet from the rather level ground, which sloped 
off toward the west and in the direction of Cata- 
ract Eiver. 

They sat there silently for a time, but evidently 
the Professor was not disposed to allow too much 
time for reflections which he knew must be gloomy 
to the boys’ impressionable minds. 

“What are you thinking about, boys? Have you 
had enough excitement for one day?” 

George was the first to reply: “I have been 
thinking about what we ought to do with the gold.” 

“Why the gold? I have been thinking of the 
boat.” 

“Do you think we ought to leave the gold there? 
Isn’t that of more importance than the boat?” 

“I do not think so, George ; we can use the boat 
to good advantage, but where can you utilize the 
gold?” 

“But why would it not be a good idea to get 
it out and take it over to the Cataract?” 

“I should advise against that very strongly.” 

“What are your reasons?” 

“Suppose we should be attacked at the Cataract 
and find the home untenable ; this place would be 


90 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


a safe retreat, and we should, in any event, have 
our treasure here in safety. It has been secure 
for the last century or so. I think it will keep for 
a few months more.” 

‘Tt had never occurred to me that we could 
use this place for such a purpose. That is a capi- 
tal idea. And did you have this in mind all 
along. Professor?” 

^^Yes.” 

After a time, when the subjects had been fully 
discussed, it was decided to try to bring the 
boat out by the new entrance, and after making 
all the measurements, ample room was found for 
this. They returned and carried and dragged it 
to the opening, and after some labor it was finally 
pushed through the opening, and when the ropes 
were attached it was lowered down the hillside, 
and dragged to a position where it could be taken 
by the team. 

‘^You should go for the team now, and I will 
continue the explorations until you return,” and 
so saying, the Professor went up the hill and en- 
tered the cave, leaving one of the lights at the 
opening. 

The boys went back to the mouth of the cave 
and found the team, as well as Eed Angel, who 
had remained there, and within a half hour were 
back again to the land entrance. The light was 
still where the Professor had placed it, and the 
boys at once entered the passageway, and went 
down the steps leading to the pirates’ chamber. 

All the bones of the skeletons had been removed 
from the passageway, where George had fallen, but 
the other skeletons were in the same place orig- 
inally seen when they discovered the remains. 


TEEASUEES OF THE CAVE 91 

The Professor was not in sight, nor did they see 
any 'glimmer of his light. 

It was he, nndoubtedly, who had removed the 
bon^s from the passageway, but they did not stop 
to notice where they were deposited. When they 
first came in both were busy discussing the situ- 
ation, in careless tones, without any pretense at 
suppressing their voices, but now that the Profes- 
sor was not in sight, and no evidence that he was 
anywhere near, the scene about them began to 
be most weird and uncanny. They spoke in un- 
dertones, and when Harry suggested that they 
might call the Professor, and thus let him know of 
their return, it was some time before George 
would consent. 

It became evident, as he did not appear, that 
something must be done, and Harry shouted 
loudly, and his voice reechoed through the cav- 
ern and came back to them from every quarter. 
In a few moments they were overjoyed to see the 
glimmer of a light directly to the east, which was 
in the opposite portion of the chamber, where, 
as his light moved forward, plainly showed an- 
other recess, or, probably, an opening similar to 
the one through which they had entered from the 
west side of the hill. 

^^Have you been waiting longf^ was his inquiry. 

^‘No; we came in less than ten minutes ago. 
Have you found anything newf’ 

‘^Nothing new, but many additional things ; but 
we must take another day for this.’^ 

This was said so significantly that they looked 
at each other, debating in their minds whether or 
not the question should be pursued any further. 

^TlavenT you had enough for one dayf’ and he 


92 


MYSTEEIES OF THE CAYEENS 


said this with such a jovial mien that it restored 
their composure and satisfied them that another 
day would bring the answer that they craved. 

As they passed out George turned to the Pro- 
fessor and asked : 

‘‘Why did you remove the remains in the pas- 
sageway f’ 

“Because I thought it might be well to examine 
them at our leisure, and therefore enable us, if pos- 
sible, to learn something of their history. I have 
put them near the steps close to the entrance.” 

As they passed out he requested Harry to bring 
up the boards from the boat, as well as som^. 
ropes and part of the canvas, which was usually 
carried with them to be used as a means for sig- 
naling. The bones were arranged on the boards, 
and kept separate from each other; after which 
the canvas wa^ severed and tied around the two 
human frames, to keep them in place, and depos- 
ited in the boat, after it had been loaded in the 
wagon. 

It was now past two o’clock, and none of them 
felt any hunger until they neared home. The trip 
had occupied over four hours, and hungry as they 
were, the reaction, after the stirring events of the 
day, was so marked that it was difficult to rouse 
them sufficiently to prepare the meal. 

Somehow, the work at the factory, the building 
of the boat, and the care of the stock did not in- 
terest them the following day. They went around 
like people in dreams. Their thoughts were cen- 
tered in the cavern on the hill, and many, many 
times during the day their eyes involuntarily 
turned that way. Was it unnatural that such 
should be the case ? When, if ever, in the history 


TEEASUEES OF THE CAVE 


93 


of human kind had such treasure been bestowed 
where the gift had been so lightly considered that 
they did not even stop long enough to count its 
valuel It seemed such an unnatural thing to do, 
and yet the only feeling was one of curiosity. 

During the entire day the boys rarely spoke to 
the Professor about the events of the previous 
day. He was busy in the laboratory with the two 
skeletons, and remained secluded. 

^‘What do you think the Professor found in the 
cave while we were getting the teamf^ 

‘T have had a curiosity to know, as well as 
yourself. Shall we ask him?^’ 

‘T do not think it would be well to do so. You 
know he is always willing and anxious to be of 
service to us and to answer every question ; it looks 
like an imposition to insist on what he evidently 
wishes to avoid.’^ 

“That is the feeling I have had. I love him be- 
cause he has been so unselfish, and during the 
time we have been associated, I do not remember 
ever having heard him utter an unkind word.’^ 

“I have often thought I wish we knew of some 
way to make him understand how we appreciate 
him and his noble ways. You remember the birth- 
day party we had for him? That touched him, as 
it did us, and it was the only time I ever saw him 
confused or in tears.’’ 

“I wish we knew his history. Did you ever hear 
him say a word about his friends or relatives? 
What affects me most is, that when any subject 
comes up, he always considers it from the stand- 
point of service to us. He never considers him- 
self.” 


CHAPTEE VIII 


KEMOVING THE VESSELS FEOM THE CAVERNS 

The boat was finally completed, and the boys 
were very anxious to have a sail in it to know how 
it would act. The utmost care had been taken to 
have it well caulked, and it was again put into the 
water, after all the leaky spots had been closed up. 

For the purpose of the test it was decided to 
put aboard a load of stone, of a weight equal to 
what their contemplated load would be, and this 
they estimated, not counting their combined 
weight, at six hundred pounds. This would be am- 
ple for all purposes. 

The day selected was bright, with a fair wind. 
By agreement Harry was selected as the skipper, 
as he knew every part of the boat. It devolved 
on him to take command for the day, but he would 
not consent to be the permanent captain, as he 
thought that a duty which devolved on the others 
as well. 

Angel was invited, you may be sure, and he en- 
joyed the idea of a sail when he recollected, as was 
no doubt the case, his former trip. There was 
evidence of the remembrance in the animal, when 
they saw him at the boat, on more than one occa- 
sion, swinging back and forth on the rigging. 

The Professor was in his element in the boat. 
It was a glorious journey for him, and the boys 
knew it was appreciated on his part. The wind 
was blowing from the west, so the sails were tacked 
94 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 95 

and an easy sail made for the mouth of the Cata- 
ract. 

Outside the sea was rolling, but not disagreeably 
so ; but a much stronger breeze sprang up toward 
midday, and before two o’clock it was very brisk. 
The cliffs were rounded, and as the wind had not 
changed quarters, the sails were set for a southern 
course. This brought them around the bay and 
toward the headland to the east of the mouth of 
South Eiver. 

That region had always possessed a fascination 
for George and an attraction for the Professor 
as well. George, particularly, was anxious to 
penetrate the river, and sail up to the falls, but 
Harry’s more practical views prevailed. “If we 
want to explore the river we can do it any day with 
a wagon, or on foot; but while we have the ship 
out, why not take a sail down the coast toward 
the mountains?” 

The Professor concurred m this as the most 
liable to give them the best results, as they were 
out for the purpose of making tests of the craft 
on the open sea. 

After sailing for an hour along the coast to the 
south, the shore line turned to a southwesterly di- 
rection, and the mountain range was now clearly 
perceptible, extending southwest, and along which 
it appeared that the coast followed. The wind 
changed and came from the mountains, and made 
progress slow. There was also a decided change 
in the temperature, and by four o’clock it was 
impossible to follow the coast except by 'constant 
tacking. 

The boat was turned to the north, and with the 


96 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 

strong wind, which had now perceptibly in- 
creased, began to make good time. As even- 
ing approached, the wind increased, until it 
blew with considerable violence, every minute 
being more boisterous, and the Professor sug- 
gested that the jib be taken down, which was 
done; hut the increasing gale, and the terrible 
strain on the mast and sail, made the boys look 
inquiringly at the Professor, for a word of warn- 
ing. 

He sat there grimly during the raging storm, 
and with the halliards gradually let down the main- 
sail when the tempest had reached such a point 
that it appeared to sweep everything from the 
boat. 

Where was Angel during all this uproar? For- 
ward in the housed portion of the boat, curled up 
in a corner, and apparently unconscious, the little 
creature did not seem at all perturbed. 

^‘DonT you think he is seasick?’^ 

^Tt is not likely. Seasickness is akin, you know, 
to that dizzy feeling some people have when at a 
height. The natural instincts of the animal pre- 
vent him from having any feeling of discomfort at 
a height. The trees are their homes, and for that 
reason they can swing from branch to branch and 
sway back and forth in the loftiest trees without 
an uncomfortable feeling.” 

The heavy blow continued until they had reached 
the cliffs, when it abated somewhat, and the boys 
anxiously inquired whether it would be safe to 
make the entrance to the river during the gale. 

‘We are out for the purpose of testing the boat. 
To make an attempt to round the cliff and steer 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 97 

it into the mouth of the river in this wind will be 
the best test of its maneuvering ability.” 

As stated, the wind was now blowing from the 
southwest, and they were northeast of the mouth 
of the stream they wished to enter. They stood 
out to sea in order to make a starboard tack, and 
it was a gratification to see the magnificent manner 
in which the vessel responded, and before six 
o’clock they found themselves sailing up the river, 
and safely landed at the boathouse. 

An examination showed that the crossbeam sup- 
porting the mainmast was split from end to end, 
and only the roof structure held it in place. Thus 
the trip had a warning lesson for them, and Harry 
was not slow to take advantage of it and install 
a larger crosspiece. 

George had entirely forgotten the incident of 
the calcareous slab which had on it the tracings of 
the cave, and which had been the means of giving 
the Professor the first hint that they were in a 
pirate’s cave. 

The first thing in the morning he went over to 
the laboratory, and called attention to the slab. 
‘^Here it is,” said the Professor. ^‘You will note 
that the light shows some characters which can 
readily be made out, and at the corner here, where 
a portion has been chipped away, it has the appear- 
ance of something else besides calcium.” 

^^Why, it looks like wood.” 

‘^That is what it is. I should not have noticed 
the wood if the peculiar lettering had not shown 
up through the coating.” 

“What are the letters, and do you know what 
they stand for?” 


98 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEKNS 


“We had better not pass judgment on that until 
we have removed all the calcium.” 

At this moment Harry came in to view the slab. 
It was the slab he had carelessly picked up in the 
cave, and therefore it had a great fascination for 
him. The calcium was carefully chipped off, and 
it was found to be a piece of oak board, with a 
smooth cut-off end, parallel sides, nine inches wide, 
nearly two inches thick, and about eleven inches 
long, the opposite end having the appearance of 
being broken. The only letters which could be 



The Slab Found in the Cave 


made out were “HI,” and a portion of another let- 
ter which could not be determined. 

“What do you think the letters were intended 
to indicate?” 

“They might be the name of a ship, or some 
sign. I do not think it was part of a ship. I tried 
to find something in the cave, on the day I went in 
while you went after the team, which would afford 
some clue, but so far nothing confirms me in any 
view which I may have.” 

“Isn't it curious that these letters should show 
through only after the slab was exposed to the 
light?” 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 99 

“Why is that any more curious than photog- 
raphy isf’ 

“Because in photography something is put on 
the glass or the sheet that the negatives are made 
of, and it turns and makes a mark under certain 
conditions.’^ 

“Well, here is something put on this slab that 
turns also. Photography is a wonderful thing. 
Dr. Draper, the first great* photographer, and who 
was also a scientist, says that every wall, or other 
object, which you stand before, has your photo- 
graph imprinted on it. The only question is to 
find some chemical which will develop the pic- 
ture.” 

“What is meant by developing the picture f’ 

“You remember some time ago we talked about 
reagents, and the properties of certain chemicals 
to act on others, and in doing so, to make a change. 
Sometimes the change is a complete one, and makes 
a new product ; in other cases the result is a com- 
plete change of color. Now, in photography, if a 
certain chemical is placed on a glass or a film, and 
the film is exposed, the light and dark portions of 
the object show on the film. The sunlight, or the 
actinic rays in the sunlight, atfect the chemical 
material so that when the fixing chemical is applied 
it prevents a change in the condition of the 
chemical.” 

“What do you mean by the actinic ray ?” 

“All light is vibration; the greatest motions 
which are perceptible to the eye, being, known as 
violet. Now there are still more rapid vibrations 
than are put forth to make the violet rays, which 


100 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 

are called the actinic rays, and are the ones which 
affect the chemicals so acutely.” 

‘Ts it then possible to photograph with a light 
that is not perceptible to the eye?” 

‘^You have heard of the x-rays, no donbt; they 
are the actinic or ultra violet, which are above the 
visible light. These light vibrations are of such a 
character that they penetrate many substances. A 
curious effect of this was shown some time ago 
when a photograph was taken of the side of a 
vessel which had several coats of paint over the 
old name, and the photograph showed not only the 
new name, but also the old one beneath.” 

The time had now arrived when they must make 
preparations for the proposed voyage of discovery 
around the island. It was a momentous time for 
them. The boys could not help but look with long- 
ing eyes to the cave. Before they went it was felt 
something more should be learned about its mys- 
teries. 

The Professor was not at all backward in en- 
couraging this feeling. 

^‘Wouldn’t it be a good thing to take such things 
out of the cave as we can make use of here, and 
during our trip?” said Harry. 

^ AVhat things do you think we could utilize ?” 

^Trobably the guns ; and then they have some 
cooking utensils.” 

“And why,” suggested George, laughingly, 
“couldn’t we take some of the money along?” 

“That would be a comfortable feeling to have 
plenty of money in our pockets. Very well, we’ll 
take this afternoon for the trip.” 

An early start was made, the lamps carefully 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 101 

trimmed and the guns, together with the bolos, col- 
lected. It was a short walk to the opening, and 
Angel, although not invited, accompanied the 
party. 

Together they descended, and soon reached the 
scene of the conflict at the large recess to the left 
of the entrance. The Professor, after reviewing 
the scene, suggested that the bones should be care- 
fully gathered together and deposited at a place 
where they could be buried. 



Pofiit^e-6e Coin , 1700 . dpanii>h Pifdole , 

QM Coin6 found 



PeruvumDollaii 
in Ckim. 


‘^We do not want them here as evidences of the 
strife.^^ 

After all had been gathered and carried to the 
spot selected, the first task was to gather the treas- 
ure found in the chests. And here a sight met 
their eyes which staggered them. One of the 
chests which Harry first found contained not only 
an immense quantity of gold coin, of Spanish and 
other mintages, but curious other pieces, all an- 
cient, as shown by the inscriptions, and long yellow 
bars, the last of which attracted George^s atten- 
tion. 


102 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


‘‘What are these barsf^ 

“They are gold bullion, made by melting up vari- 
ous articles, and probably the coin itself, so as to 
make it convenient for transportation.” 

“My ! how heavy they are ! and look at the num- 
ber !” 

When all had been assorted the Professor sug- 
gested that as they had plenty of copper utensils, 
the latter might be used as receptacles for the 
gold. The other chest contained but little coin, 
but here the interest was not less pronounced than 
in the other chest, because the vessels found were 
not only of beautiful, but many of curious, design. 
Some were of silver, as well, and the boys knew 
that those would be serviceable for their table, and 
at their suggestion all such were laid aside to be 
removed to the Cataract. 

The kitchen utensils afforded a more varied col- 
lection than had been anticipated. Six of the 
larger copper vessels were required to hold the 
money, jewelry and other articles taken from the 
two decayed chests, and there were still remain- 
ing at least a dozen more smaller jars and pots, 
some with handles, which would be exceedingly 
useful in their kitchen. 

All these were carefully put aside, and the 
smaller silver articles deposited in them. And 
now the guns ! Seven skeletons were found, two 
of which had been removed to the Cataract by the 
Professor. After all the guns had been collected, 
twelve were counted. 

“I suppose each fellow had two of them,” was 
Harry’s conclusion. 

“If you will go over into the chamber to the 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 103 

east you will find a sufficient number to assure 
you that they were not lacking firearms.’’ 

The boys now understood. He had told them on 
the second day’s exploration that he did not find 
anything new, but only something more. Why not 
go and see it now. But they were restrained. A 
dozen guns were certainly enough. These were 
also set aside, and it was then agreed to place the 
vessels containing the treasure in a secluded nook, 
in the extreme corner of the large recess. Sam- 
ples of the clothing, some of the knives or daggers, 
as well as the little trinkets, found near each of 
the bodies, were deposited in the receptacles that 
had been selected for removal. 

All this accumulation of material was more than 
they had bargained for when they left the Cataract, 
so that the failure to bring the team was keenly 
felt. However, it was the work of an hour, only, 
to get the team, and it was a pretty fair load which 
went from the pirates’ haunts to the home on the 
river. 

George’s curiosity could not keep him from tak- 
ing some of the coins which he exhibited when 
they returned, and which they would have ample 
leisure to examine. 

Harry’s thoughts were turned to the firearms. 
They were certainly of an antiquated pattern. The 
first thing was their length. Two of them were 
unusually long, fully six and a half feet. 

‘T wonder why it was they made their guns so 
long?” he inquired. 

^^The reason was, probably, that the quality of 
powder was so bad that the bullet would get out 
before all the powder was consumed. All the an- 


104 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

cient pistols were very inefficient, l^ecause of the 
short barrel. Even down to the time of the Amer- 
ican Revolution the guns on board of war vessels 
were not capable of throwing shot very far, and ; 
the most effective ones were those with long 
barrels.’^ 

‘Tn what respect is the powder of to-day more 
powerful than in olden times f ’ 

^‘Particularly in the fact that formulas have been 
devised which make a higher expansion, or give 
a greater volume of gas. The other feature of ■ 
value is, that chemical means have been discov- 
ered whereby the moment a sufficient amount of 
heat has developed in the powder it instantly 
burns — not a slow fusing, like the old powders — 
but the combustion is instantaneous. These two 
factors working together have greatly improved 
even the black powders.” 

After their return the interest in the articles - 
was so great, and the inventory took so much time, j 
that the disappearance of Angel had been entirely 
forgotten. All remembered him going along, and 
no one had seen him enter the cave. None of 
them believed he could be induced to go in, hence i 
no particular notice was taken of his movements. 

An hour after the return, Harry saw Angel 
coming over the field at the east of the Cataract, 
dragging something after him laboriously. All 
stood and watched him as he neared home. He 
had a stick, apparently, but it seemed to be unusu- 
ally heavy. 

George ran out to assist him, and when he came 
up he gravely handed to article to George. It was 
the barrel of a gun, with part of the flintlock still 


EEMOVING THE VESSELS 


105 


attached, but it was rusted almost beyond recogni- 
tion, the bore completely filled with dirt, accumu- 
lation and rust. 

‘^Where do you suppose the little rascal found 
this V’ 

The Professor examined it. ^^Outside of the 
cave, undoubtedly. The curious part about it is, 
that this weapon is of an entirely different and 
more modern pattern than those we have sam- 
ples of.” 

Harry took the gun and ran in to where the 
others were deposited, and true enough, it was not 
only shorter, but it had a smaller bore, and what 
is more, the outside of the barrel was octagonal, 
whereas the barrels of those inside of the cave 
were all round. 

As the Professor predicted, the guns which they 
recovered were too much rusted to be of any serv- 
ice, and furthermore, they were made of iron, very 
much softer than the steel of which their own 
guns were constructed, and it is questionable 
whether they would be able to withstand a charge 
of the comparatively high power powder which 
had been made for the modern guns. 

As curiosities the weapons were good things 
to have; otherwise they were of no value. This 
was not so with the vessels, which could be and 
were utilized in the kitchen and in that capacity 
were of the highest use. The table was supplied 
with articles of the purest silver, and it had a 
royal look. 


CHAPTER IX 


MAKING ELECTRICITY 

In order that you may get some sort of idea 
concerning the condition of our little colony, at 
this time, it would be well to give a brief review 
of the situation. When they landed on the island 
the year before, with nothing but the clothing 
they wore, the prospect of being delivered was not 
a flattering one, as day after day passed by. 

Here were two boys, unused to the privations of 
life, with youth and vigor, cut off from all the 
pleasures of manhood, surrounded by dangers, 
and day after day having mysteries thrust upon 
them which only increased their fears. These 
things necessarily must have produced an impres- 
sion much deeper than would be the case with 
hardened men. 

In the effort to discover, produce and build the 
various tools, weapons, and articles of clothing, 
to hunt food, and in the endeavor to learn about 
the condition of the island, and guard themselves 
against foes which might be all about them, im- 
posed immense responsibilities. 

In their struggles were personified the contests 
of the human race from the beginning of the 
world, in the effort to conquer nature, and to 
make it contribute to their necessities. 

The Professor knew how such a*condition would 
tend to make active minds either productive of 
good, or to fly out in the opposite direction and 
106 


MAKING ELECTRICITY 


107 


cultivate tlie low and sordid instincts. Occupa- 
tion, work, tlie utilization of the mind, and above 
all, to direct their energies into useful channels, 
had been the Professor’s one absorbing aim. 

The boys had responded, as all boys will, not 
for the love of gain or for power or glory. Our 
boys had none of these. Other boys do not need 
them any more than those on Wonder Island. 
What they do need is a true stimulus for work; 
and when that evening they were gathered to- 
gether in the cozy little living room at the Cata- 
ract, the Professor who for two days had been 
particularly reticent and retired, said: 

“Can you imagine the condition of the pirates 
who gathered all that hoard in the cave? What 
do you think their aim was in life?” 

“It seems to me,” was Harry’s reply, “that the 
only thing they were after was wealth.” 

“If what we see in the cave is any indication, 
the principal thing they lived for was to kill 
somebody,” was George’s conclusion. 

The answers made him smile. “You have, I 
presume, answered the question in the two sen- 
tences. But there is something that you haven’t 
mentioned, which is at the bottom of it all.” 

“Yes ; wanting to kill to get the money.” 

“That only states your previous answers in a 
more concrete way. There is one word which de- 
scribes it accurately: Selfishness. When a man 
inquires into the secrets of nature ; when he tries 
to turn the knowledge gained into account, either 
for money or glory ; when he consistently devotes 
his days to labor, and his nights to thoughts to 
find out how he may do something better, or 


108 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


quicker, or cheaper, it might all be denominated 
selfishness, and so it is, in a way. It is a selfish- 
ness, however, that does no injury to a fellow- 
man. That kind of selfishness is the great quality 
which has produced the wonderful things that we 
see all about us, and which distinguishes the man 
from the brute creation.’^ 

‘'But I have read of a great many men who 
made millions and millions and who never did 
any of the things you have just referred to,” an- 
swered Harry. 

“Then do you think they are any better than 
the pirates were?” 

Notwithstanding the exciting times, food was a 
necessity, and it had to be found and prepared. It 
could not be bought. All the gold in the cave 
would not purchase a single meal. More barley 
had to be ground and the stock of honey was al- 
most exhausted. Their duties in the shop, conse- 
quent on the haste exhibited to get the boat and 
weapons ready, contributed to the low state of 
supplies. 

George announced that there was less than two 
pounds of the honey left, and proposed that a trip 
be taken to the flats, where the Professor had 
found the sugar cane. All joined in the journey 
to the cane field, and Angel was invited to join, 
which invitation was accepted by him gleefully. 

The bolos were taken for the purpose of cut- 
ting the cane, and on the way George’s inevitable 
question point was in evidence. “What did peo- 
ple use for sweetening purposes before cane was 
discovered ?” 

“Honey was the principal source of the world’s 


MAKING ELECTEICITY 


109 


sweets. But cane is not tlie only kind of vege- 
table from which the principle has been extracted. 
There are many kinds of reeds which furnish a 
sweetish substance. Sugar cane was first made 
known in eastern Europe by the conquest of Alex- 
ander the Great. Nearchus, one of his admirals, 
in sailing down the Indus, found the reed, and it 
was, previous to that time, known throughout the 
greater part of India. He described it as a kind 
of honey growing in canes and reeds. From this 
you may infer that honey was the principal source 
of sweets in his time.’’ 

“What are the other principal plants or sub- 
stances that sugar is made from?” 

“Mainly from beet, tubers of various kinds, 
such as the common dahlias, and numerous vegeta- 
bles, from milk, fruit, gum arabic, as well as fish.” 

“I have heard it said that sugar contains all 
that is necessary to sustain life. Is that true?” 

“That is a mistaken idea. It will sustain life for 
quite a time and with the addition of nitrogenous 
matter has great fattening properties, but without 
that it is not valuable as food.” 

“What do you mean by nitrogenous matter?” 

“Meat, fish, eggs, milk, beans, peas, and the like, 
all contain a large amount of nitrogen.” 

“I remember my arm being burned on one occa- 
sion, and mother made a syrup out of sugar and 
put it on. In what way was the sugar beneficial ?” 

“In the first place, sugar is one of the most pow- 
erful antiseptics known. It acts, therefore, as an 
aid to healing, since it protects the wound from 
foreign substances and from poisonous and harm- 


110 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

ful germs. In the next place, it is a great pre- 
servative for either fruit or flesh.” 

The cane was cut close to the root, and the 
top and leaves trimmed oft. Within several hours 
a full load was thus procured. The boys enjoyed 
the pith, and George playfully gave some to An- 
gel. His surprise knew no bounds. When he 



knew what the cane was good for, he simply 
gorged on it. 

Harry at once set to work on turning up two 
rollers from hickory, the rollers being eight inches 
in diameter, and eighteen inches long, and each be- 
ing provided with a spindle four inches in diame- 
ter. One end of each of the spindles was longer 
than the other, so pulleys could be attached, the ob- 
ject being to provide a means whereby they might 
be turned by suitable belts from the water wheel. 
In addition, the top roller was made so it would 
yield, and had levers resting on the spindles, and 
provided with weights, so the rollers would press 


MAKING ELECTRICITY 111 

out the juice, whatever the quantity that might be 
placed between the rollers. 

It was really a simple little machine to put up, 
but it required a day for both of them. Vessels 
were now provided for the juice, and when they 
were filled, the Professor suggested that a little 
lime should be put into the juice, after it had been 
strained through the ramie cloth. 

^AVhat is the object of putting in limef^ 

‘^To precipitate the impurities.” 

The action of the lime was plainly visible, and 
after it had been allowed to settle, the clarified 
portion was drawn off, and the process of boiling 
down was proceeded with. As fast as one of the 
vessels was boiled down, more of the cane was 
crushed, the juice being dipped from one vessel 
to the second one, until the entire load was crushed 
and the juice boiled down to a thick consistency. 

Here was molasses, at any rate a good sub- 
stitute for honey, and it was so homelike to get the 
real article. That night they had molasses candy. 
It felt like old times. It was a real candy pulling, 
and no one enjoyed it more than Angel. From the 
moment he had the first taste of the pulp of the 
cane, he was the most interested one of the party. 
But the fun came the next morning, when George 
brought out, for his benefit, some of the talfy 
which had been set out to harden. The chuckle 
which he emitted, when he tried to pry off a piece 
of the sweet morsel, was too amusing for words. 

When the entire amount of juice had been boiled 
down and it had reached the point where it had 
the appearance of granulating, the fire was with- 
drawn, and the whole mass stirred until it was 


112 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


cooled, and the result was a fine sample of beau- 
tiful brown sugar which weighed forty-three 
pounds. 

Nevertheless food was an important item in 
their preparations, the necessities for doing every- 
thing in their power to insure the success of the 
maritime enterprise. One of the most valuable 
adjuncts for sailing is a compass. No attempt 
had been made to produce the implement, and 
when the needs of the expedition were being dis- 
cussed, Harry was curious to know the reason 
why the compass always pointed north and south. 

The Professor was very much interested in all 
electrical phenomena and replied : ‘‘The earth is 

tXX'tX’' I 

A Magnet 

a huge magnet, and any body which is magnetized 
has a north and a south pole. The needle which 
is also a magnetized body has, in like manner, a 
north and a south pole.’’ 

“But in what manner does that make the needle 
point in one way onlyf’ 

“Electricity is a very curious thing. While the 
current unquestionably moves from one end to the 
other of a conductor, it also exhibits itself in the 
form of rings around the wire. This may not 
be understood in the absence of a sketch. For 
that purpose I make a drawing (Fig. 17) which 
shows a conductor (A), through which a current 
is passing, and this current is represented by the 
spiral line (B) which goes around the conductor.” 


MAKING ELECTEICITY 


113 


‘‘Well, is magnetism the same as electricity?’^ 
“Both exhibit the same manifestations. Mag- 
netism is nothing more than a body charged with 
electricity. The electricity, which appears to 
travel around the conductor (A), extends out for 
some distance from its body, and produces what 
is called a magnetic field. This is the case 
whether the magnet is a permanent one, like the 
earth, or whether the conductor is charged by a 
dynamo.” 

“What is the difference between the north and 
the south pole?” 

— jS 



I^ig. 28 . 


Magnetic Indcction 


“There is really no difference. The terms 
north or south and positive or negative are mere 
relative designations, and are distinguished 
simply by the movement or direction of the travel 
of the current. You will remember when we made 
the battery, it was shown that the current, out- 
side of the battery, moved from the positive to 
the negative pole. That was merely stating that 
it moved from the north to the south pole outside 
of the earth, and from the south to the north 
pole inside of the earth. The current is, there- 
fore, from one magnetic pole to the other.” 

“What I cannot understand is why the mag- 
netic poles should be at the north pole and at the 
south pole.” 


114 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


^^The magnetic poles are not at the poles of the 
rotation of the earth, but hundreds of miles away, 
to one side of the poles on which the earth rotates ; 
but they are near enough to the real poles, for 
all purposes, so that the needle points to what 
we call the north pole of the earth. Any magne- 
tized body must have these two opposite poles. 
If it is a body, like a bar of iron, one end is called 
north and the other south. Look at this other 
sketch (Fig. 18) and you will see how the currents 
flow in the two magnets. In this case the 
large body (E) represents the earth and the small 
body (M) the magnet. Now notice that the cur- 
rent going around the large body moves to the 
right, or to the north pole, whereas the current 
in the small magnet (M) flows in the opposite 
direction.’^ 

^‘And does the current flowing around the bars, 
as you have shown, make the small magnet turn 
around so that it is always parallel with the large 
magnet, and make the north pole of one magnet 
at the same end with the south pole of the other 
magnet f ’ 

‘A^es; to make it still clearer, I make two more 
drawings (Figs. 19 and 19a), in which two sets of 
magnets are shown. In the first of these pairs of 
magnets (Fig. 19), the two north poles approach 
each other, and the two south poles are opposite 
each other. The currents, if you will notice, at 
the north poles move toward each other, and at 
the south poles move away from each other. 
They are, therefore, acting against each other, 
and the result will be that the magnets will 
move away from each other. If, now, one 


MAKING ELECTRICITY 115 

of the magnets is turned so the poles of one 
magnet approach the opposite poles of the 
other magnet, as shown in the second view (Fig. 
19a), they will attract each other, because the 
current is permitted to flow through the two mag- 
nets in the same direction without one conflicting 
with the other.’^ 

‘Ts that the reason it is stated that likes repel 
and unlikes attract 
^^Yes.” 

In order to take advantage of this knowledge, 
knowing that the earth is a great permanent mag- 





The Two Magnets 

net, it was necessary to make a small magnet, and 
so suspend it that it would turn freely, and the 
magnetic north and south could then be deter- 
mined. 

To do this the battery which had been previ- 
ously made was brought into play. George took 
a hand in the work, and while they were prepar- 
ing the metal for the little bar, said: ^Tou spoke 
about a permanent magnet. What other kinds of 
magnets are there?” 

‘‘Magnets are permanent or temporary. A per- 
manent magnet is one in which the electricity re- 
sides, or remains, as it does in the earth. A 
temporary magnet is one which has magnetism 


116 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

imparted to it only while a current of electricity 
is passing around it.” 

‘^How is the current made to pass around itf^ 

*^By wrapping an insulated wire around it, and 
sending a current through the wire. When that 
is done the same thing is done to the bar as the 
bar of the permanent magnet exhibits. As soon, 
however, as the current through the wire ceases, 
the bar is again demagnetized. That is, it ceases 
to be a magnet.” 

^AVe have the small bars ready. Professor. 
What is the next step 

^Tt must be hardened so as to make it a flinty 
steel. The harder the better, so that it will pre- 
serve the magnetism imparted to it.” 

‘Ts that the better way to make the temporary 
magnet?” 

‘‘No; in that case the bar should be of the soft- 
est iron. Remember, therefore, that for a per- 
manent magnet, use the hardest steel, and for a 
temporary one, the softest iron.” 

“Then as we want to make a permanent magnet, 
must we harden both of the bars ?” 

“No; for our uses, one must be left soft, 
because on that we shall want to wind some in- 
sulated wire to make a temporary magnet.” 

The small amount of wire which was on hand 
was then coated with a thin layer of the ramie 
fiber, which was carefully wrapped around, so that 
the different layers of wire could not touch each 
other. When this was completed, a spool was 
constructed, which fitted over the little bar or 
rod, because they were rounded off, and one end 
of the soft iron rod extended out beyond the 
spool. 


MAKING ELECTKICITY 


117 


The opposite ends of the winding were then 
brought out and attached to the terminal wires of 
the battery. A test showed that the magnet thus 
made would readily pick up pieces of iron or steel. 
The Professor then took the hardened steel rod, 
through which a small hole had been bored, mid- 
way between its ends, and laying it down on the 
table, the projecting end of the temporary mag- 
net which projected from the spool was put into 
contact with the hard steel rod, and slowly drawn 
along to the end. The soft bar magnet was then 



raised up and again repeated, as shown in the 
drawing (Fig. 20), where the dotted line (A) rep- 
resents the movement of the end of the tempo- 
rary magnet. 

This was repeated over and over a great many 
times, and finally the hard steel bar was found 
to have a charge of magnetism, and for the pur- 
pose of providing a means for holding the magne- 
tism, a C-shaped piece of iron was put on the 
bar, as shown in the detached figure. 

‘Ts that the reason,^’ asked Harry, “why a small 
piece of metal is always put across the ends of a 
horseshoe magnet when it is not in usef” 

“Yes.” 


CHAPTEE X 

STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST 

“If I remember correctly, you stated some time 
ago, Professor, that the barometer indicated the 
pressure of the atmosphere, and in that way it 
was useful in letting us know what the weather 
would be. Before we sail, would it not be well 
to make one of them? If we had possession of 
one of the articles, we might not have been caught 
in the storm the first time we took out No. 3.” 

“That is a good suggestion. I intended to pro- 
pose that, because with the barometer and the 
compass we shall be equipped with two of the 
most useful instruments needed.” 

“I cannot comprehend how the air pressure has 
anything to do with the weather. Is the air pres- 
sure really greater at one time than at another?” 

“Heated air ascends, does it not?” 

“Yes ; I can understand that.” 

“As it ascends it is, therefore, lighter at that 
point than normally. On the other hand, moist 
air is heavier than dry air. These two conditions 
would be indicated by the barometric column, 
would they not?” 

“I presume they would ; but when the air is 
moisture laden we donT need a barometer to tell 
it is going to rain. We know it and feel it. What 
I particularly wanted to know was how the barom- 
eter by its actions would indicate it ahead for 
any length of time.” 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 


119 


‘‘The barometer does not indicate with any de- 
gree of accuracy on land; hnt on sea it has a 
much better application. The instrument shows 
the present pressure of the atmosphere, and its 
variations correspond to atmospherical changes 
which have already taken place, the effects of 
which may follow their cause at a greater or less 
interval.” 

“Then how could it be ascertained from the 
instrument when there would be a storm or rain 

“After a continuance of dry weather, if the 
barometer begins to fall slowly and steadily, rain 
will certainly ensue; but if the fine weather has 
been of long duration, and the mercury may fall 
for two or three days before any perceptible 
change takes place; the more time elapses be- 
fore the rain comes, the longer the wet weather is 
likely to last.” 

“Then what indicates dry weather ?” 

“If, after a great deal of wet weather, with the 
barometer below its mean height, the mercury be- 
gins to rise steadily and slowly, fine weather will 
come, though two or three wet days may first 
elapse ; and the fine weather will be more perma- 
nent in proportion to the length of time that 
passes before the perceptible change takes place.” 

“Is this the case at all times of the year?” 

“The seasons affect the barometer, it is true. 
A sudden fall of the barometer in the autumn or 
in the spring indicates wind; in the summer or 
in hot weather it prognosticates a thunderstorm ; 
in winter, after frost, a sudden fall of the mer- 
cury shows a change of wind or a thaw with rain ; 


120 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


but in a continued frost a rise of mercury indi- 
cates approaching snow/’ 

‘Tt seems, then, that a man must be pretty well 
versed in the weather to be able to read the 
signs.” 

‘^That is a correct observation. The instru- 
ment in the hands of one who has had experience 
with its use is absolutely necessary; it is not a 
very satisfying device for those who do not take 
the time or trouble to read all the signs, and note 
all the indications.” 

As detailed in a preceding chapter, the hard- 
ened steel rod for the compass was brought out 
for the purpose of securing it in a little case, so 
that it might be utilized to give them the true 
north. 

. It was a difficult task to find a means of suspend- 
ing it, for the reason that they had no tools which 
would make fine and carefully pivoted balances, 
but eventually this was done, and they were grati- 
fied to see the little rod or bar swing around 
and point north and south. 

The work of arranging suitable closets for the 
various provisions and providing a miniature 
kitchen was the next thing in order. This occu- 
pied several days. Instead of taking the bedding 
in their house, it was decided that new mattresses 
should be made up from the barley, of which there 
was quite a quantity on hand. 

One of the receptacles taken from the cave was 
a copper jar, which held five gallons of water. A 
top was made for this which could be sealed up, 
to hold a reserve supply of water. In addition 
two other vessels were also provided for the regu- 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 


121 


lar supply, and also fitted with covers, so that 
they had about ten gallons, an amount which was 
considered sufficient. 

The matter of fuel was a more difficult one to 
solve, unless they intended to prepare most of the 
food before starting ; but George insisted that the 
small stove should be put aboard, and about fifty 
pounds of the coal stowed away. 

^^How long do you think we should provision 
forf’ was George’s inquiry, as they were carry- 
ing the various things aboard. 

Harry had no ideas on the subject, but the 
Professor ventured the opinion that at least two 
weeks’ supply should be arranged for. 

This conclusion rather startled the boys, who 
had not expected more than a few days’ trip, and 
when they questioned him about his reasons for 
making the statement, he said : ‘^Did you ever hear 
of the old lady who attended a special meeting 
of prayer for rain? She came with an umbrella, 
and the people laughed and chided her. The min- 
ister reproved them, saying: ^She, at least, has 
faith, which you have not.’ We are going for 
two purposes: one is to learn something about 
the island we are on, and the other to rescue our 
companions if they can be found. We couldn’t 
rescue them and let them starve.” 

Those words impressed them as nothing there- 
tofore had, that the Professor believed they 
were really going to find their former shipmates, 
and that they would have stirring times before 
them. 

Nothing so stimulates the actions of men, or 
boys, as the prospect of adventure. Their trip 


122 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


had a double meaning, and it is not venturing too 
much to say that their feelings were most tense 
during the entire period in which they were en- 
gaged at the task of fitting out the little ship. 

At last the day was set for the departure. The 
cattle could take care of themselves. A tablet 
was prepared to be put up on their dwelling, stat- 
ing who were the owners of the habitation, their 
present destination, and briefly relating the knowl- 
edge they possessed of the inhabitants of the is- 
land, a statement of the direction they had taken, 
and the kind of boat to which they trusted their 
destiny, and when they expected to return. 

A copy of this was then carried to the pole on 
Observation Hill, and nailed to the mast, to re- 
place the small tablet which had hitherto filled 
that place. They were to launch the boat for the 
start on the morrow. 

That night a storm blew up from the west, as 
most of the winds had previously blown from that 
quarter during the past month. The storm was 
severe during the entire night, and abated some- 
what in the forenoon, but it again increased in 
fury before noon and continued with more or less 
vigor all that day and during the night. 

‘T am afraid this storm will prevent us from 
starting for several days, on account of its wide- 
spread character. The sea for hundreds of 
miles has been subject to this monsoon, and we 
would have a very rough time until the sea quiets 
down.^’ 

The delay was a bitter thing for the boys. Ex- 
pectation had run high. Anticipation doesn’t 
mildly or easily brook waiting. They did not 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 


123 


know what to do, or how to pass the time in the 
interim. It was such a new and trying condition 
for them. 

The Professor noticed how they chafed under 
the restraint, but apparently took no heed of it. 
However, he encouraged them in every effort they 
made to divert themselves and to occupy their 
minds during the waiting period. 

During one of these spells which come on all 
more or less during such trying hours, George 
could not hold in any longer, but broke out impa- 
tiently: “What is the use of waiting any longer? 
The storm may keep up for a week.” 

“Then do you think we had better venture a 
start under these conditions?” 

George thought a while. He appreciated the 
risk. Harry, too, was anxious and nervous, and 
expressed a willingness to take the risk. 

“Let me put another side to the question,” said 
the Professor. “We are perfectly safe here. You 
take no risks by remaining. You have in the cave 
treasure that will make you millionaires. You 
cannot afford to take any risks. If we knew some- 
thing of the conditions on the island, and had a 
certain knowledge that our comrades were in dan- 
ger, the considerations I have named should not 
deter us from starting. But with all these things 
in the dark, and with the monsoons likely to break 
out again at any time, the question is whether we 
can afford to risk the safety of the enterprise be- 
cause of impatience at delay.” 

“Yes,” answered Harry. “I have thought of 
these things, and I feel that the Professor’s ad- 
vice should be followed.” 


124 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


The boys were particularly surprised that he 
should refer to the money in the cave as a reason 
why they should consider their actions in the mat- 
ter. It was so unlike him to refer to any sordid 
considerations as a reason for not performing a 
great duty. 

would also remind you that one of the great- 
est boons ever given to the great investigators of 
the world came through delays. Time is a won- 
derful reasoner. It is also a great modifier of 
events. Darwin was prevented for twenty years 
in promulgating his great thesis ; some of the most 
marvelous inventions took years to bring out and 
develop into such a state as to make them accept- 
able to the world. Delays, patiently borne, make 
strong men. The impetuous think they represent 
wasted opportunities. Davy Crockett enunciated 
one of the greatest principles of human action 
when he said, ^Be sure you are right, then go 
ahead.’ It was only another way of advising 
against recklessness or impatience in any enter- 
prise.” 

Thus three days passed, and not without misgiv- 
ings, the signal was given for the start. Angel 
accompanied them, and with a new flag which 
the days of leisure had given them an opportunity 
to prepare, the little craft sailed down the waters 
of Cataract, in a shining sun, bound for a haven 
which might mean rest, or to a shore which might 
offer no welcome to them. The wind was coming 
mildly from the north, and when they had cleared 
the shore line and were beyond the influence of the 
swells, their course was directed to the west. Sev- 
eral miles beyond was a point which projected out 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 


125 


to sea ; they could see this plainly from Observa- 
tion Hill, and during the last long trip inland they 
reached the sea beyond this cape. 

The shore line beyond was absolutely unknown 
to them, but it extended to the west as far as they 
could see, and when night set in the faint mist 
prevented them from judging how much farther 
it ran in that direction. 

Without proper instruments at sea, distance is 
always a difficult matter to judge, and the boys 
were constantly venturing guesses as to the dis- 
tance traveled. The start was made shortly 
after nine o’clock, and it was now past six in the 
evening. 

“How far do you think we have gone during 
the dayf’ was George’s question. 

The Professor made a mental calculation before 
replying. “If we have traveled at the same speed 
during the entire course that we made during 
the first three miles to the cape, we have gone about 
thirty miles.” 

“Do you know it is three miles to the cape?” 

“Yes, it is approximately that distance. I meas- 
ured it by triangulation some time ago, using our 
house and Observation Hill as the base line.” 

The boys had neglected to take this precaution. 

“What was your object in doing that?” 

“So that we might have some means to observe 
the speed our boat could make. If we knew the 
speed of the wind, we might be able to calculate 
our distance.” 

“But the wind has been coming from the north 
and we are sailing due west. Would not the dif- 


126 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

ference in the speed of the wind make a differ- 
ence in the speed of the boat?” 

^Tt was for that reason I stated if onr rate of 
travel was the same we would have made that 
distance. The wind has been variable at different 
points along the coast, so that our average may 
have been four miles per hour.” 

‘At what speed has the wind been during the 
day; I mean the average speed?” 

“Less than eight miles an hour?” 

“If the wind had been coming from the east we 
could have made much better time, and we might 
then have been near the mouth of the West River,” 
was Harry’s conclusion. 

“Why do you think we should have made bet- 
ter time?” asked the Professor. 

“Because we should then have been going with 
the wind.” 

“You are entirely wrong in your assumption. 
Sailing ships travel faster when tacking than 
when sailing with the wind.” 

The boys looked at the Professor in astonish- 
ment. 

“It does not seem possible,” replied George, 
“that any movement of the wind pushing sidewise 
could be more effective than a pressure straight 
ahead. Can you explain the reason for the state- 
ment?” 

“When the wind blows straight against a sail, 
certain eddies are produced which cause a con- 
volute stream around its edges. These currents 
are counter to the forward movement of the ves- 
sel. Assuming that this normal pressure of the 
wind is 1,000 pounds, it is estimated that fully 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 


127 


half is lost in effectiveness. On the other hand, 
if the ship is moving forward at right angles to 
the direction of the wind, and the sail is set at 
forty-five degrees, that is what is called a tack; 
while it has only about six-sevenths the surface 
that it had when going with the wind, the sail is 



T^j^. S, 1. T^i^. £3. 

Illustrating Wind Pressure 

constantly going into new wind and, therefore, 
the pressure is a constant one and most efficiently 
applied to the surface.” 

“Do you mean by this that if I hold up a sail 
so that the wind blows flat against it, the pressure 
will not be as great as if I held it at an angle I” 
“No; I had reference to a moving object. I 
can better explain the phenomenon by illustrating 
the two conditions : In the drawing (Fig. 21), let 
A represent a sail with 100 square feet of surface. 
The darts (1) represent the wind blowing dead 


128 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


against it. This is called the normal position. 
Yon will see the darts representing the direction 
of the movement of the wind. Now look at the 
next sketch (Fig. 22). Here the sail (B) is put at 
an angle of forty-five degrees from the direction of 
the wind. The sail is still the same size vertically, 
hnt it is somewhat smaller horizontally across the 
line (C), this diminution in size being about one- 
seventh of the entire area. The darts (H) in both 
cases represent the movement of the boat, and 
the darts (2) in the last sketch show the wind strik- 
ing the sail at an angle.” 

“In the first sketch the darts (1) strike the sail 
normally, as you say; in what way do the darts 
(2) in the next figure strike the sail!” 

“At an angle of incidence. If you will notice 
the behavior of the wind in the first view it will 
be seen that the wind curves around the edges of 
the sail, and strikes against the back of it, and 
thus produces the retarding effect I referred to. 
On the other hand, by examining the second 
sketch, the darts (2) plainly show their course 
across the sail diverted from their straight source, 
and behind the bulging sail the air does not press 
against the sail, but tries to continue in a straight 
line. As a result a partial vacuum is formed 
along the region designated by E, and this pro- 
duces a most effective pull, since the sail con- 
stantly tries to move forward and fill this vacuum. 
Is this made clear to you!” 

“I can plainly see now what the action of the 
air is, but does the air push just as hard against 
each square foot when it is at an angle as when 
it is blowing against it straight!” 

“That is a good observation, and one that might 


VOYAGE TO THE WEST 129 

ordinarily be overlooked. No, it does not, but 
the difference can be readily calculated.” 

‘'Then supposing the sail to be 10 feet square, 
and the wind is blowing against it straight, as in 
the first sketch, at the rate of twenty miles an 
hour; what pressure would there be against the 
entire sail?” 

“At that speed of wind the pressure on each 
square foot of surface is 2 pounds, and this mul- 
tiplied by 100 equals 200 pounds.” 

“When it is at forty-five degrees, what is the 
pressure on each square foot?” 

“This is determined in the following manner: 
Square the speed of the wind, which means mul- 
tiplying 20 by 20, and this produces the square, 
400. In mathematics, as in many of the sciences, 
a constant is employed. A constant is a figure 
which never varies. In this case the constant is 
designated by the decimal .005. That means 
5/lOOOth, or reduced to its lowest denomination, 
l/200th. If, now, we divide 400 by 1/200, the re- 
sult will be 2 pounds. This figure thus represents 
the pressure of air on each square foot of sur- 
face, which, multiplied by the sail area, 100 square , 
feet, makes 200 pounds.” 

“If that is the push when it is normal, what will 
it be at 45 degrees?” 

“Each angle of incidence has its own figure, or 
coefficient, or for your better understanding, value, ' 
and the value at 45 degrees is .666. So that by 
multiplying 200 by this value, we get a total pres- 
sure of 13^2 pounds.” 

“These figures are used a great deal in flying 
machines; are they not?” 


130 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


‘‘Yes; and that is a subject which we might 
pursue, but there are some things right ahead 
that may for the present interest us more/’ 

Through the haze which had now settled down, 
a faint outline of land was made out in the dis- 
tance. The course was altered to the northeast, 
and after a quarter-hour sail, land was again 
espied ahead, so that to avoid the shore the course 
was taken due north. This was evidence that the 
land projected northwardly, and the Professor 
suggested that the effort should be made to chart 
as accurately as possible the shore line. This 
could be done mentally. 

“I had forgotten to take any note,” said Harry. 
“What is the proper thing to observe in making 
these calculations?” 

“Two things must always be uppermost in the 
mind of the explorer on the sea : First the time, 
and second the speed. Time can always be accu- 
rately determined, but the question of speed can 
come by experience only. A good sailor can 
very accurately determine speed by an examina- 
tion of the passing water, where the sea is com- 
paratively calm. I have known where the dis- 
tances have been thus estimated within a hundred 
feet in each mile in a ten-mile course, and where 
the speeds were varied along the route. Then, 
a good observer must have the gift of direction. 
If he has sailed one hour at a certain speed in a 
given direction his mental chart may be of the 
greatest service to him. In our case it would be 
invaluable. It is a quality well worth our effort 
to acquire.” 


CHAPTER XI 


A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK 

The shadows of night were now upon them. 
How vividly it recalled to their minds the horrors 
of the five days and nights during which they were 
tossed about in the little lifeboat a year before. 
Then they were helpless, and now strong. At 
that time everything was dark and gloomy, with- 
out a ray of hope. Contrast the situation at this 
time. 

What a gratification it must have been to look 
back during the past twelve months and mentally 
calculate what they had accomplished. They had 
delved in many of the hidden mysteries of nature 
and learned the secrets. Such knowledge had 
been put to use. They had discovered many 
things that gave them pleasure, but in doing so 
found others that startled and grieved them. 
Things inexplainable and impossible to fathom 
had crossed their paths on almost every side. 

But they were now doing the work of men. The 
Professor knew how they had developed, and 
grown brave and strong. He knew it better than 
the boys could realize themselves. WTiat a source 
of pleasure it must have been to the kindly faced, 
gray-haired Professor, as he looked at his charges 
in admiration and love. Could anything be more 
inspiring than the contemplation of the work he 
had done? 

And now the inevitable charting board was 
131 


132 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


brought out, and the plan adopted which would en- 
able them to trace the coast line. It was explained 
that all sailing was by the points of the compass, 
and for this purpose the compass was made to 
correspond with the regulation instrument. This 
is shown in Fig. 23. 



2 ^. 28 . 
Mariner’s Compass 


The four cardinal points are north, south, east 
and west. Exactly midway between each of 
the four points are the divisions designated north- 
east, southeast, southwest and northwest. Then, 
again, intermediate, the last divisions and the car- 
dinal points are other markings which show that 
the angles are nearer one of the cardinal points 
than the other, so that a course may be marked 
off, by the compass, which, if followed for a cer- 
tain time, and the speed of that period deter- 
mined, can be traced and thus marked out on 


‘WdS 


A TEEEIBLE VOYAGE 


133 





134 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


paper so that the outline of the coast can thereby 
be laid out. 

The Professor had the charting board before 
him. have marked our starting point, which 
is designated as A. It will be remembered that 
we marked a course due west, passing the head- 
land three miles from Cataract River. This is 
line 1. Vn^ien we saw the land ahead of us last 
night, we changed our course by the compass to 
northwest, thus making a new line of travel, which 



The Charting Board 


you see is designated as 2. B was the point where 
the turn was made.” 

^^But in what manner did you know how to 
transfer it to the board?” 

“The board has two lines crossing each other at 
right angles to correspond with the two lines on 
the compass. The compass was put on the middle 
of the board, and the upper board turned so that 
the needle was on a line with the N S line.” 

The boys now noticed for the first time that 
there were two boards, one above the other, and 
that the lower one was a little larger, and was 


A TERRIBLE VOYAGE 


135 


attached to the boat. ^‘Why do you have the 
lower board attached to the boat and larger than 
the upper one 

‘‘The lower board has on it a section of the com- 
pass, and the upper end a pointer, as you notice, 
and the line T represents the boat’s direction, so 
that when the compass was placed on the upper 
board, the latter was turned so that it corresponded 
with the points of the compass. The little pointer 
then accurately pointed to northwest, on the lower 
board, and by this means the changing of the up- 
per board, so as to keep it due east and west at 
all times, will enable us to keep on our course.” 

It was a long and weary night. One of them 
slept while the others were on duty. The boys 
knew the time on shipboard, where the day be- 
gins at midnight, and is divided into watches of 
four hours each, thus making three watches for 
the night and three for the day. A bell is struck 
every half hour, so that each watch is noted by 
the eight strokes of the bell. What is called the 
dog-watches occur between 4 and 8 p.*m., this 
period being divided in the first dog-watch be- 
tween 4 and 6, and the second dog-watch between 
6 and 8. 

“Why should such peculiar times be taken, or 
the periods be divided up in that way?” 

“For the very reason that we discussed the ar- 
ranging of our time of watch last night ; namely, 
so that one person would not have the same watch 
every night. It was agreed by us that one should 
have three hours’ uninterrupted sleep, while the 
others were on duty, so that each would in turn 
get three hours’ work. Our arrangements are 
somewhat different from shipboard time, on ac- 


136 MYSTERIES OP THE CAVERNS 

count of our number, but tbe principle is tbe 
same.” 

During the night the wind changed to the north, 
so that progress was slow and required consider- 
able tacking, and when the Professor came on 
duty he found the course still to the north, and on 
questioning Harry, found that the wind had been 
rather regular during his watch. Within a half 
hour of the time he took charge the western shore 
faded away, and the course was directed to NWW, 
in which direction they continued until well along 
in the forenoon. Then, as the land receded again, 
another tack was made, WbS, which means West 
by South. 

The winds, however, were perverse during the 
second day. After a calm the wind veered to the 
west, and when in the afternoon the course was 
changed to SSW they had to sail close to the 
wind, and made slow progress. 

Let us see what they found on the day’s journey 
along the northern point which they rounded the 
second (!ay of the journey. Clitfs, like their own, 
were distinctly visible in the evening and during 
the morning of the second day, but when morning 
broke on the third day they saw a beautiful shore 
line, and beyond the mountain range which was 
seen by them on their land trip to West Eiver. 
It was now certain that the mouth of that river 
had been passed during the night and all regretted 
this. 

During the whole of the third day they were 
forced to sail in the teeth of the wind, which neces- 
sitated frequent tacking. Not a sign of human 
habitation was seen on this day, but during the 
night, when the boys were on duty, they declared 


A TEREIBLE VOYAGE 


137 


that they had seen lights to the south. The in- 
terest was most intense. Were they really round- 
ing the island? 

The course for the opening morning of the 
fourth day was SWbW, and early in the day they 
were not more than a mile from the shore, and 
then the shore gradually receded, but the course 
was not changed. The wind began to blow with 
greater force, and came from the southwest. As 
night approached it increased, but they continued 
tacking, hoping that they might reach the west- 
ern extremity, and thus be able to run to the east 
before the wind. 

Before eight o’clock lights were distinctly visi- 
ble. They had reached the vicinity of human habi- 
tations. The boys were too excited to think of 
the watches which had thus far been observed. 
Aside from that, the wind had now reached sucH 
a violent stage that it was impossible to make any 
headway against it. 

A consultation was had. ‘‘We must either turn 
to the north or go to shore. I fear this sudden 
change in the direction of the wind,” was the Pro- 
fessor’s opinion of the situation. It would not be 
wise to risk the shore. All knew that and 
sadly they turned the craft to the north. It was 
well that they did so. Every moment, it seemed, 
some new impetus would be given the wind. It 
howled on every side of them; the waves drifted 
across the little ship, until everything was drip- 
ping with moisture, and the only dry spot was 
within the little housed enclosure which had been 
well protected on the open rear side, thanks to 
the watchful suggestions of the Professor. 

To add to their discomfort of mind, the land was 


138 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


not in sight. There was nothing to steer by ex- 
cept the compass and the chart which had been 
laid out. They were now going north over the 
course that had been traversed for the past two 
days — the west coast of the island. 

It was a long, long night. No one slept, be- 
cause fear and anxiety was ever with them. They 
remembered now with vividness the days spent on 
the ocean when they were wrecked. It was a 
terrible succession of hours, with the wind and the 
lightning and the rain one continuous orgy. The 
Professor sat at the tiller. The sails had been 
taken down long before. The impact of the driv- 
ing storm against the housed structure was suffi- 
cient to drive it forward, so that the vessel could 
be guided. 

It seemed that every blow against the boat 
would wrench it to atoms, but if any part had 
given way it was not apparent. Harry, who sat 
nearest the housed structure, suddenly sprang 
up, and pointing down, cried out: ‘Tt is leaking; 
look how it boils!” It was forethought on the 
part of the Professor to put in a supply of the 
oakum used for caulking purposes. Harry sprang 
for it, and George grasped the bailing pan. After 
a struggle a sufficient amount was driven into 
interstices to keep out at least a portion of the 
seepage. This knowledge was most oppressive. 
When a boat of this kind once springs a leak, 
due to a severe wrench of the shell itself, it is a 
difficult matter to remedy it, without structurally 
strengthening it. 

Morning was now appearing, and still no land 
appeared in sight. More leaks appeared, and 
the boys were now constantly bailing and repair- 


A TEREIBLE VOYAGE 


139 


ing. The Professor had held the tiller for more 
than six hours, but he did not appear to be ex- 
hausted. At every attempt of the boys to relieve 
him, he only said that they had more important 
work in bailing and caulking. 

He finally changed the course due east, and it 
was more by luck than exact calculation that they 
made out the northern end of the island which was 
passed the first night out. In one night they had 
traveled a distance coming hack that required 
two days and nights to traverse in the other direc- 
tion. As it was they were headed for the cliffs 
at the point of land, and it must he avoided. 

Harry saw the danger, and went hack to con- 
sult the Professor. He had the tiller firmly in 
his grasp, and his body bent over it to keep it 
steady ; but when Harry reached him, and touched 
him, there was no response. Almost frantic, he 
cried to George : “Come here, quickly ; something 
is the matter!” 

George was there in an instant, and caught up 
the Professor, while Harry grasped the tiller, as it 
was released, and turned it to starboard. The 
little boat responded, but Harry knew that if 
turned too far, the wind might catch, it on the 
beam and crush it to atoms. 

The Professor had fainted, and when George 
finally revived him, he looked about, and seeing 
Harry at the tiller, told him that he must turn to 
the left to avoid the cliffs, and when he was ad- 
vised of what had been done, he grasped Harry’s 
hand, and commended him for the knowledge and 
foresight which had been exhibited in that trying 
moment. 

The cliffs were ahead and to the right. The 


140 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


crucial time must come within the next half hour. 
The point must not only be cleared, but they must 
pass it at a distance beyond the influence of the 
powerful swells and waves, which are always 
present at points situated like this. The storm 
was from the west, and the promontory pointed to 
the north. Under the circumstances, the sea at the 
end of the land was a raging maelstrom, and the 
counter influence of the raging waves, beyond the 
point, offered as great a danger as at its extremity. 

And now the leaks appeared at every side. De- 
spair almost overtook Harry, and he moved from 
one point to the next with the oakum and the 
caulking tool. The Professor had insisted on 
again taking the helm. He had been refreshed by 
the few moments’ relaxation. Slowly he moved 
over to the tiller. Would he ever make it? The 
boys stopped their work, fascinated with the nerve- 
racking intensity of it. They knew the point had 
been passed. The Professor smiled, and held up 
his hand as a signal, and the boys rushed to him 
and actually cried, as he put his arms about them. 

It must not be imagined that they were out of 
their peril now. Nearly a foot of water was in 
the bottom. The storm was, in a measure, 
blanketed by the cliffs, and there was now no alter- 
native but to reach the shore. It was fortunate 
that they were on the lee side of the land, but 
even there the waves rolled up on the shore, and 
the Professor knew that any landing which might 
be made would be hazardous in the extreme. 

The vessel was approaching a shelving beach. 
Fortunately, from what could be distinguished 
of its character, it was not a broken or rocky 
shore. 


A TEREIBLE VOYAGE 


141 


‘‘Boys, can yon pnt up the mainsail f’ The 
Professor’s voice had a wonderful ring to it, for 
one so nearly exhausted. Without waiting to 
question they sprang to the halliards and drew it 
up, while the boat in the meantime was turned to 
port to ease the operation. 

The hoys looked on in wonder as the tiller was 
turned and, when the boat had gained headway, 
was pointed to the shore. It fairly darted 
through the surf and the billows which marked 
the shore line, but before the boat touched the 
beach, the Professor motioned them to come back. 
“Now hold fast, when we strike.” 

In another instant they seemed to be lifted by 
a giant wave, and as it receded the boat, impelled 
forwardly by the sail, struck the sand of the beach 
the moment after the tiller had been brought hard 
to port. The result was that the boat was now 
spun around with its stern toward the oncoming 
wind, but the impact was so great that the entire 
left side of the little ship was crushed like an egg 
shell. 

“Eelease the boom, quickly !” 

When that had been done the wrecked vessel 
was still, and the Professor was lifted out of the 
boat, but he stood there grasping the side, too 
stiff to move, but with that same smile on his 
countenance which had told the boys on so many 
occasions before, how gratified he was at their 
safety. 

Poor Angel was actually a wreck. He had re- 
mained within the housed enclosure ever since 
the storm began. When the rocking and tossing 
of the boat ceased, and he heard nothing but the 


142 MYSTEEIES OP THE CAVERNS 


beating wind, be could not understand what had 
happened. 

All had forgotten the little animal. George 
was the first to go to his rescue, and found him 
crouching in the extreme end of the enclosure. 
After some coaxing he moved toward George, and 
when he was led out and saw about him on one side 
the raging waves and on the other side the land, 
his chatter turned to a chuckle, and he leaped to 
the land, shambled up the bank, and catching the 
limb of the nearest tree, was soon in its top, as 
happy as though ocean storms were unknown. 

Meals had been forgotten since the day before. 
The boat was so high up on the beach that they 
had no fears for the waves. Hunger asserted it- 
self now, and the moment the stove was brought 
out, Angel was down in a moment, came over to 
George, and looked up inquiringly into his face. 
It was such a comical situation, coming so close 
upon the heels of their great catastrophe, that he 
could not help laughing. He knew what that look 
meant, and Angel had more than the usual share 
of sugar. That with the nuts, of which there was 
always an abundant supply, was a feast for the 
little fellow. 

After the meal a careful examination was made 
of the boat. The entire left side, from the bow to 
a third of the way back from the midship bulge, 
was broken to atoms. The inside of the boat was 
filled with sand which had been driven in when 
the impact took place. To repair it would be im- 
possible without suitable lumber, to say nothing 
of tools. They sat down, not with a feeling of 
despair, so that they might the better form a 
judgment as to the wisest course to pursue. 


A TEREIBLE VOYAGE 


143 


‘‘What interests me most/^ said George, “is to 
know where we are. Do yon think we are any- 
where near West River 

The Professor sat there musing, but did not 
answer. Harry ventured the opinion that they 
must be far east of the mouth of that river. 

Finally the Professor gave his views: “It is 
simply impossible for us to speculate on the course 
of the river, because we were unfortunate enough 
to pass it by in the night. It seems to me more 
probable, however, that it finds its way to the 
sea to the east of the point we came around.” 

“What reason have you for thinking so?” 

“Simply because the mountains were not, ap- 
parently, far inland, and it seems to me that the 
promontory is merely an extension of the moun- 
tains or the high ridge we saw.” 

“I would certainly feel more comfortable,” con- 
tinued George “if I knew we were anywhere near 
the river.” 

But some decision must be made, and that with- 
out delay. If they were near West River the dis- 
tance home was fully seventy-five miles. Prepa- 
rations must be made for the trip on foot. The 
boat was, probably, in as safe a condition as it 
could be higher up, nevertheless it was concluded 
to take no chances, and all the provisions were 
removed, and by means of levers and blocks, it 
was carried inland fully thirty feet farther. A 
good supply of provisions was then taken, the 
guns and ammunition removed, and put in sepa- 
rate piles, and arranged in convenient packages 
for easy transportation. 

The residue was carefully stored within the 
housed enclosure, and carefully covered over. 


144 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


What grieved them most was the bedding, which 
must be left, but the Professor insisted that all 
the articles of ramie, which would afford some 
covering, should be taken along. They would now 
be compelled to sleep in the open air, with noth- 
ing else to cover them. 

With a last look at their ship, they moved to- 
ward the oast with heavy hearts. 

Harry stopped before they had gone far. ‘Tt 
occurs to me that we ought to put some inscrip- 
tion on the boat. If any of our friends should 
discover the boat it might guide them to us.” 

‘^That is a capital idea,” answered the Profes- 
sor ; and they returned to put up the proper notice. 

It was past noon, but they hoped to cover at 
least ten miles before evening should set in, but 
the way was rough and broken. think,” mused 
the Professor, as they halted on the journey, ^Ve 
made a mistake in not following the seashore. 
The only reason that prompted me to take this 
course was the appearance of the shore to the 
east of our landing place. It looked so uninvit- 
ing that I felt sure we should find traveling inland 
more comfortable.” 

During the first five miles of the journey the 
ascent was gradual, but not steep, at any place, 
but now the land gradually showed a change in 
character, growing smoother and more open, and 
they knew the grade had changed and was taking 
them down to a lower level. 

Before evening came, emerging from a light 
wood, great was the delight at seeing a beautiful 
river before them. It was a broad stream, and 
they divined that it must be the West River, which 
they had so longed to reach. 


CHAPTER XII 

THE EETUBN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTAH 

Here they were on the banks of a broad stream, 
tired and hungry. The experiences which they 
had gone through made the task of seeking suit- 
able shelter an easy one. An entire month of 
preparation had been wasted. Aside from the 
lights which were seen on the fourth day on the 
western shore, they had no more knowledge than 
when they started. It seemed to be very dis- 
couraging. 

But they were going home. This was the most 
comforting thought and it made up for a great 
deal of the disappointments. There was real 
grief at the loss of the boat. True, it could be 
recovered, but all this meant time and hard work. 
It should be said, however, that at no time had 
either of the boys ever found fault with the tasks 
that were allotted to them. 

In this fact the Professor found much comfort. 
It was a strong factor, as he knew, in the lives of 
the boys. It required the highest sort of courage 
to bear misfortune without complaining. 

The camp for the night was soon made, and 
after a hearty meal all retired for the night. 
Early in the morning the boys were at work, as 
soon as the morning meal was finished, construct- 
ing a raft of sufficient size to carry them across, 
and when the timbers had been securely lashed 
and all their luggage placed aboard, the poles and 
145 


146 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEKNS 


primitive paddles gave them a trying half hour 
to make the trip. 

The stream was rather wide at this point, and 
it was believed to be near the sea, and the sugges- 
tion was made to follow the stream down for an 
hour, to ascertain whether the ocean would ap- 
pear in view, and if not, to take up the trail for 
the east. 

In less than a half hour the sea was in sight. 
The course was then directed east, but after travel- 
ing the entire forenoon through the most difficult 
paths, it was decided to change the course to the 
south. 

‘Tf you recall, we took a more southerly course 
when we left the West River on our overland trip, 
and found much better traveling.” 

The ProfessoFs words recalled the incident, and 
the result was a change to the southeast. This 
was now the sixth day after leaving home in the 
No. 3. During the day at least twenty miles was 
made. Shortly before night, George, who was in 
the lead, stopped, and then moved forward, gazing 
at the ground intently. 

Harry saw the movement and was at his side 
in an instant. ^^What is it?” It was not neces- 
sary to continue his inquiry. Directly ahead was 
a slightly cleared space, with a blackened space 
in the center, where a fire undoubtedly had been 
made, and a few bones were still scattered about 
as mute evidences of occupation. 

The Professor looked at it a moment, and then 
smiled. ^‘DonT you remember our own camp 
fire?” This was the case. While they could not 
remember the particular spot, they knew the old 


THE RETUEN TRIP 147 

trail had been crossed, and it was a comfortable, 
homelike feeling to come across the spot. 

‘^Let us camp here again, said Harry, as he 
threw down his pack. On this occasion they did 
not have the wagon and the yaks, but they had 
an ample supply of food and there was no diffi- 
culty in making a fire. 

Their first adventure came about noon of the 
seventh day. Plenty of evidences of animals had 
been found, but they were not eager to hunt. The 
trail for home had far more fascination than all 
the animals on the island. It was the custom to 
stop at intervals for rest. During one of these 
stops the cracking of bushes was heard, as though 
produced by a cautious tread. The boys were 
alert at once and, with their guns in hand, moved 
in the direction of the noises. 

Not two hundred feet away was an immense 
bear, of the same species they had shot near that 
place nine months before. The boys separated, 
as they approached, under the guiding direction 
of the Professor, and when within seventy-five 
feet, Harry asked whether or not he should shoot. 

Bruin was slowly moving away, not directly 
ahead, but as though crossing Harry^s path. 
When the word was given, Harry took deliberate 
aim. George reserved his shot, as advised. The 
moment the shot struck, the animal turned, thus 
exposing a fair mark for George, who now fired. 
With a howl at the second shot, the bear turned 
toward George, who immediately ran to the right, 
and on the call of the Professor, circled to the 
right. 

This brought the animal within range of the 


148 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Professor’s gun, and he fired. It did not in the 
least check his pursuit of George, and the Pro- 
fessor now became alarmed at his safety. Call 
after call was made to advise him to turn to the 
right. 

Harry followed as fast as he could run, and 
while keeping the animal in sight, could not ap- 
proach closely enough to get another shot. While 
running, it occurred to him that he had not re- 
loaded, and it would be impossible to reload while 
running. 

The Professor realized the situation, and im- 
mediately reloaded, and calling after Harry, told 
him that he had a charged weapon. Harry heard, 
but he was so excited and fearful for George that 
he could not decide whether to stop or go on. He 
could see the bear, but George was not in sight. 

The Professor followed as rapidly as he could. 
Harry saw the bear lumberingly cross a large 
fallen tree and pass on to the right, and thinking 
George had taken that course, did not wait to go 
up to the tree. Before the Professor reached 
Harry, who was now running at right angles to 
the course of the Professor, George emerged from 
his place of concealment behind the tree and 
laughed at the sport, which might have had seri- 
ous results but for the dead tree. 

You may be sure no further effort was made 
to follow up the bear, and they took up the search 
for their luggage, which had been left behind. 
During all this hubbub, Angel had been left with 
the luggage, and he now appeared along the trees, 
swinging from branch to branch, uttering the most 
fearful shrieks and chattering, as he was in the 
habit of doing when alarmed or excited. 


THE EETURN TRIP 


149 


^^Something is after Angel; quick!’’ called out 
George, as Angel made his way over to him. 
Harry grasped the loaded gun from the Pro- 
fessor and started toward the direction from 
which the orang had come, hut he stopped sud- 
denly after going several hundred feet. 

‘‘The bear has our things.” The Professor and 
George came up, and there, with his powerful 
claws and massive jaws, was Bruin, devouring 
their best morsels and playing havoc with the 
packages that were piled together. 

The boys looked at the Professor, and he play- 
fully answered the look by saying, “We really 
don’t want any bear meat to-day, do we f ’ George 
thought it was a good joke on the hunters, but 
Harry was angered. “Let us finish him. See him 
break that gun?” 

The Professor was busy reloading Harry’s gun, 
which he had exchanged with him, and handed it 
to George. They approached, but not close 
enough to venture a shot, when the animal delib- 
erately turned away and darted into the bush. 

What was left of their luggage worth taking 
could easily be carried by either of them. Prac- 
tically all of the food was gone or ruined, and the 
bear was recompensed for the little inconvenience 
by the two pounds or more of sugar which was 
taken. 

“Well, boys, everything has its compensations. 
We have nothing to carry, and traveling will be 
easy for the rest of the trip. Let us take a good 
laugh over the experience.” 

Harry was too much annoyed, first at the failure 
to hit the brute and then at the mean trick in eat- 
ing up and destroying their things while they were 


150 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

trying to follow him. The Professor suggested 
that it would be fun to visit Bruin’s house that 
night when he came home and told his family 
what a neat trick he had played on some hunters, 
and Harry laughed, but it was an awfully forced 
effort. 



Guam 


When evening came they estimated that the dis- 
tance still to be traveled could not exceed thirty- 
five miles, and they were seeking a good spot for 
the camp. The Professor was the first to make 
his appearance with a small yellow pear, which 
he held up. 

“What have you found nowf’ George inquired, 
as he came running forward with a branch in his 
hand. 

“Pears!” exclaimed Harry, as he took it from 
the Professor’s hand. 

“Not exactly a pear; but a fine fruit which we 
can use to good advantage. It is the guava.” 


THE EETURN TRIP 


151 


“Wliat a beautiful white flower ! I did not know 
that the guava had such a delightful odor. In 
what way is it prepared and used?” 

''You will see, by tasting it that the pulp is 
very aromatic and sweet. Its principal use is for 
jellies and preserves, and the rind stewed with 
milk makes an excellent marmalade.” 

"Have you found many of them?” 

"There are several trees over there, and it seems 
to me that it is a good place to put up for the night, 
and we can gather a quantity of them.” 



^7 Coffee. 


Several trees were in sight, about 18 feet high, 
beautiful branching specimens, and beneath one 
of them the camp was made for the night. 

While they were seated the Professor noticed 
the branch which George had brought. It was a 
stem about two feet long, with a lot of leaves on 
each side, and at the juncture of the leaves with 
the stem were rows of what appeared to be nuts. 
These were in the form of clusters. 

He picked it up. "I thought I had made a good 
find in the guava, but this is still better.” 


152 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


‘‘The nuts around the stem are what attracted 
me, and my curiosity was aroused.” 

“You took this from the coffee tree.” 

“Is it the real coffee?” 

“It is the genuine article. I have searched' for 
it from time to time. Let us go over and see 
the tree. We must cultivate its acquaintance.” 

They responded with alacrity. They were now 
going to have coffee. The tree was fully twenty 
feet high, and the branches extended out horizon- 
tally from all sides. 

“Earlier in the season these nuts, as George 
called them, looked like cherries.” 

“But where is the coffee ?” 

“Inside the berry. Each berry contains two 
seeds. You know how the coffee berry looks. 
Let us open one of them. See, it is smaller than 
the ordinary berries, as you know them, but the 
kind we know are cultivated, which makes them 
larger, and fuller in appearance. These will make 
ffne coffee, however, and I think we shall have 
to divide our load with the guavas.” 

“Where did coffee originally come from? Is it 
found in many places throughout the world?” 

“The plant is supposed to be a native of Arabia 
in Asia, and of Abyssinia, in Africa. From 
Arabia it was carried to most of the tropical coun- 
tries, but many varieties have been found in the 
western hemisphere. Even in Canada certain 
kinds of coffee plants are known. It is not, there- 
fore, a wholly tropical plant. The Abyssinian 
coffee has been known from the earliest times.” 

“What is regarded as the best kind of coffee?” 

“The best coffee of commerce is the Mocha, and • 


THE EETUEN TEIP 153 

next comes Java, and the principal coffee center of 
the world is Brazil.” 

On the morning of the eighth day they were 
awake early, and the boys began work on the 
berries. Angel took a hand in the proceedings, 
and as soon as he discovered what the boys were 
after he volunteered to harvest them. At this 
time the berries had somewhat hardened, and 
when Angel knew what was wanted, his long dex- 
trous fingers were able to strip off more of the 
fruit in one stroke than the four hands of the boys. 
Harry was on the lower limb, and as fast as he had 
stripped a supply, would drop them into the out- 
stretched cloth which the Professor and George 
held. 

Angel eyed this proceeding, for a time, and then 
imitated Harry. How did he ever learn the art 
of picking coffee berries? The orang lives prin- 
cipally on nuts and berries, and the instinct to 
gather these was a natural one. 

In an incredible short space of time fully a 
bushel had been taken off. It was the original 
idea of the boys to cut off the limbs, but they had 
seen none of the trees before this, and the Pro- 
fessor advised them to pick the fruit itself. With- 
out Angel’s expert help it would have been a 
long job. 

With a load of guavas and another of coffee, 
the five guns, and a few of the other relics of their 
ill-fated expedition, was sufficient for the two days^ 
journey still before them. That afternoon, while 
resting by the side of a little stream that flowed 
to the north, the antics of Angel attracted atten- 


154 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


tion. He was usually so quiet that no notice was 
taken of him. 

He had two peculiar ways of making himself 
understood. One was a gurgling sound, which 
indicated pleasure and contentment ; and the other 
a chatter, or half a shriek, when intensely excited 
or alarmed. But now he did neither of these 
things. The sounds emitted could not well be de- 
scribed. 

The sounds were made while springing from 
branch to branch. When he had attracted 
George’s attention he ran forward, usually along 
the branches, but close to the ground. George 
followed. Whenever he attempted to go back to 
his comrades, Angel would come back, and in his 
most beseeching way endeavor to induce George 
to follow. His actions were well understood in 
this respect, because it will be remembered that 
he directed the attention to the missing team, and 
afterwards rediscovered the trail after it had been 
lost. 

“Follow him, George, and we will bring the 
packages,” was Harry’s suggestion. 

It was not necessary for them to go far. Beyond, 
in some large trees, were three immense orang- 
outans, intently gazing on the newcomer. George 
ran back, crying out: “See the orang-outans in 
the trees ! Isn’t this the place we captured 
Angel !” 

Harry threw down the load and was by the side 
of George without a moment’s delay. “Where is 
Angel? I am afraid this is the last of the little 
fellow.” And Harry showed his grief. They saw 
Angel on his way to the trees, and without waiting 


THE EETUEN TEIP 155 

for an invitation, was np among the branches, vis- 
iting his friends, and, probably, his parents. 

All stood there awaiting the results breathlessly. 
Not a word was spoken. Without hesitation he 
swung himself to the last limb, on which the patri- 
arch perched. Not a hand was lifted against him, 
but they looked too astonished to speak, even if 
they could. 

Angel went from one to the other. He petted 
them, as George had often petted him. He knew 
what a caress meant, but his kin did not. It was 
too much for George. ^^Come down, Angel ; good 
boy; come down.” And he said it pathetically, 
too. 

Not a hand was held out to him, nor did he get 
any sort of welcome, and yet he had expected 
so much, from what he tried to tell George, while 
on the way to his old home. It was too much 
for him. He heard that familiar voice, and the 
call that was always a welcome one, and he slowly 
descended the tree, not with that springy motion 
which characterized his ascent, but hesitatingly 
and in measured swings. 

He went up to George and leaned against him, 
and then they knew that Angel intended to go 
home with them again. But they could not help 
watching the effect of Angel’s actions on the ani- 
mals in the trees. Ordinarily, they will quickly 
spring away from any intruders, as they do not 
generally consider the trees high enough to give 
protection. Their remarkable agility enables 
them to travel faster by the tree line than man 
can follow on foot. 

But now that Angel was again with the boys, 


156 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

all sense of fear seemed to leave tlie three crea- 
tures in the trees. They looked down at the pro- 
ceedings, and as the boys passed by they sat in 
their specially prepared seats, as though they 
knew the care which had been bestowed on their 
offspring. 

This little incident affected all more than it is 
possible to tell. The animal was really a marvel- 
ous character. True, George had spent hours 
and days in his education. He knew many of the 
words, and could execute missions, and did many 
things to aid George in the work at home, and 
it would have been a trial and a sorrow to miss 
him. 

The next day would see them home again, and 
they could hardly restrain themselves at the 
thought of it. What if some one should have vis- 
ited them while absent? Why might not the sav- 
ages have found their abode? These were ques- 
tions ever uppermost in the minds of all. 

Before noon they reached the Cataract River 
to the west of the forest. This seemed like an old 
friend. i\nd what was more: before they had 
gone many miles, the Professor pointed to a clear- 
ing, and remarked : ‘^Do you remember this 
place ?’^ 

The boys looked about, as they moved forward, 
do not recollect the place,” was George’s an- 
swer, but Harry now recalled the fight of the 
bears, and the honey tree, and without saying a 
word he ran to the tree, which was still lying 
there, and said one word, ^^Honey.” 

George now remembered, and Angel began to 
gurgle. 


CHAPTER XIII 


THE STKANGE VISITOK 

In the afternoon of the ninth day, emerging 
from the forests, the first sight that met their 
eyes was the fiag floating from the top of Obser- 
vation Hill. Never before had the flag looked 
so glorious, and they could not repress a shout 
and a cheer. The distance home was at least four 
miles, but tired as they were, no one felt like stop- 
ping for a rest. 

Everything at the home seemed quiet and peace- 
ful. The cattle were there, lazily scattered about, 
apparently not knowing or caring whether their 
masters were absent. The boys were moving 
along jauntily, happy as larks, singing snatches 
of songs, and amusing the Professor with sallies 
of wit and humor. 

Angel was just as happy and was enjoying the 
prospects of coming home. Long before the home 
was neared he started off on a racb, with George 
at his heels. Burdened as he was, it was impossi- 
ble to keep up with the animal, so that the latter 
was at the house long before George came near. 
He was surprised to see Angel bounding toward 
him with his peculiar chattering that betokened 
excitement, and he stopped and hesitated what 
to do. 

Depositing his load on the ground, he ran back, 
and signaled to the others. Angel came up and 
tried to tell them in his peculiar way of some dan- 
157 


158 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


ger ahead. Two hundred feet south of the house 
was a thick growth of underbrush, and to that 
the party made its way. 

Arriving there, a consultation was had, on the 
course of procedure. Nothing was, apparently, 
disturbed. No sign of human presence was mani- 
fest. The door which opened to the main room, 
facing the west, was closed, as well as the room 
of the workshop. 

‘Tf anyone is about the premises he must be 
beyond the house, as it is evident some signs would 
show in the house or shop. Prepare your guns 
and let us go forward.” 

The house was cautiously approached, and 
reached, and Harry quietly gained the door, and 
the secret bolt opened. The door was slowly 
opened and he peered in. It was unoccupied, and 
all rushed in. A small trap-door on the northern 
side was now opened, which gave a view toward 
the shop and cattle-yard. 

What they saw there startled them beyond meas- 
ure, for seated on a log, outside of the cattle-shed, 
was a man, with a straggling, unkempt beard, 
vacantly gazing into space. 

‘‘How shall we attract his attention?” asked 
Harry, breathlessly. 

“Let us rush out the front door. He is, appar- 
ently, alone.” 

At the signal, with their guns ready, they filed 
out, and moved toward him. He raised his eyes, 
and at first was a little startled, but again relaxed, 
and seemed to take no particular notice of their 
approach. The Professor walked toward him, 
and held out his hand. The stranger made no 
motion or protest, either of fear or recognition. 


THE STRANGE VISITOR 159 

and as the Professor’s hand touched him, his 
hand was involuntarily extended. 

Not a word was uttered by him. The Professor 
turned to the hoys. ‘^He is demented, or has lost 
all knowledge of his condition or surroundings. 
Poor fellow !” 

The Professor addressed him. He looked star- 
tled at the sound of a human voice, and as the 
voices continued, began to look inquiringly at one 
and then at the other. He was a man fully fifty 
years of age, strong, well built, but somewhat ema- 
ciated. His eyes had no luster, the beard was 
long and shaggy, and aside from the tom and 
almost unrecognizable trousers, the only article of 
clothing was an equally dilapidated shirt. 

George grasped Harry, excitedly. ‘‘Where did 
he get that shirt ? That is the one we used as our 
first signal flag, and which we lost five months 
ago.” Such was indeed the case. The only thing 
in its torn and tattered condition, which enabled 
him to recognize it were the initials of George, 
which he had noticed. 

Thus was one of the mysteries explained. De- 
spite every attempt at conversation, not a word 
escaped his lips. The Professor took him by the 
arm, and led him to the house. He entered and 
looked around not particularly interested, but 
more in curiosity than otherwise. 

“Wliat do you suppose he has been living on, 
and where has he been staying?” 

At the suggestion of the Professor, some food 
was brought, and placed before him. He gazed 
at it. A knife and fork were on the table. He 
reached for them slowly, and when he had grasped 
both began to eat ravenously. He finished with- 


160 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


out looking up, and when the last morsel was 
eaten stared about, and a faint smile appeared, 
which was the first facial change that had crossed 
his features since they met him. 

He was conducted to a reclining chair, and such 
articles of clothing as they could find were 
brought out and laid before him. He gazed on 
them, and slowly picked up one after the other. 
His feet were bare, and appeared to have been 
scratched and tom, but they were hardened 
by contact with the earth. An old pair of 
shoes, the ones discarded by the Professor, 
when they turned out the first lot of shoes, was 
set before him. 

He picked them up and mechanically put them 
on. “Now let us leave him alone for a while.’^ 
They went out, closing the door, and Harry stole 
around to the small port which he had opened, and 
watched the stranger. 

His demeanor did not change after they left; 
he simply glanced about the room. When his 
eyes fell on the table, he arose and cautiously ap- 
proached, and suddenly seized the table knife, with 
just a slight change of countenance. This he at- 
tempted to secrete beneath his ragged shirt. 

“Do you think he is dangerous f ’ 

“His malady is a peculiar one, and arises from 
various causes. I do not think we need fear him.’^ 

“But see how he took that knife.” 

“That was simply an instinct ; that of self-pro- 
tection. Any other implement would have been as 
acceptable as a knife. Possibly, the sight of the 
knife, temporarily, may have brought back some 
glimmering remembrance of his sane moments.” 

“Do you think he is insane ?” 


THE STEANGE VISITOE 


161 


“No; it does not appear to be of such a char- 
acter. He seems to exhibit loss of memory. Im- 
becility, idiocy, and lunacy exhibit marked ten- 
dencies, and have been made the careful study of 
many eminent men, and it is even now one of the 
disorders least understood by the medical frater- 
nity.” 

“What is a lunatic 

“Blackstone, the great English authority on law, 
defines it as ^one that hath had understanding, but 
by grief, disease, or other accident hath lost the 
use of his reason.’ This eminent authority also 
stated that lunatics may have frequent lucid in- 
tervals, and might enjoy the use of their senses 
during certain periods of the moon. It is from 
that source we are indebted to the still prevailing 
idea of the moon’s influence on the human mind. 
That view was exploded long ago, and shown to 
have no foundation.” 

“What is the difference between a lunatic and an 
insane person?” 

“The original term was lunatic, in accordance 
with Blackstone’s definition; but in medical sci- 
ence the terms insanity and mental alienation have 
taken its place.” 

“Doesn’t he act peculiarly? He does not seem 
to know we are present. What I cannot under- 
stand is, how he knows enough to get anything 
to eat.” 

“That is a peculiar thing in nature. Here is a 
man who has, outwardly, the appearance of an 
intelligent being, incapable of talking, or uttering 
intelligible sounds, with memory so submerged 
that he doesn’t, likely, recognize his own kind, and 
yet has. been able to find food for at least five 


162 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


months, to our knowledge. It shows that, irre- 
spective of mind, nature has implanted some kind 
of an instinct of preservation in living beings. 
The subject is one that has been discussed from 
many standpoints, and it can never be exhausted.’^ 

The boys now went over the entire premises, 
carefully examining every part. Evidences were 
plenty to show that the man had slept in the shed 
adjoining the stable, and the shells of nuts as 
well as barley^ heads were found around the place 
he had slept. 

There was everything to indicate that his trials 
and sufferings on the island had deranged him. 
Probably his was a case like many instances 
known, where consciousness of self — the absolute 
loss of memory, had caused disappearances, and 
many instances have been recorded where intelli- 
gence finally asserted itself and brought back for- 
mer recollections. 

The instinct to clothe himself was shown when 
they returned. The Professor went up to him 
kindly and spoke. The words were repeated in 
German and French, but not one word did he ut- 
ter, nor did he give the least visible sign of recog- 
nition. 

During the afternoon he wandered around from 
place to place. The boys were too much fasci- 
nated to turn their attention to anything. George 
started out for a trip to Observation Hill, accom- 
panied, as usual, by Angel. The strange man was 
passed on the way. Without a sign he followed. 
George was a little frightened, but soon recovered, 
as he walked along unconcernedly. 

They crawled up the steep ascent, instead of 
going around the gentler ascent, and when the pole 


THE STRANGE VISITOR 


163 


was reached, the stranger for the first time took 
any interest in anything he saw. He looked up 
at the flag, and then out over the sea, and as he 
did so, he put up his hand to shade his eyes from 
the glare of the sun. This was the only human 
thing which was noticed about him. 

When George left, he followed, walking erect, 
and he could not help admiring his strong, al- 
though drawn, features, and the admirable build 
of his frame. He would be an antagonist to fear 
as an enemy. 

On the return, George stated the occurrence, and 
the Professor said that the man was no doubt 
used to the sea, as his walk betrayed that, and 
the incident of shading his eyes is a common one 
to all seafaring men. 

But now came up the great question of the 
future course to be followed. What should be 
done! The determination to again attempt fur- 
ther exploitations was fixed in the minds of all; 
but how should it be conducted! Should they 
again brave the dangers of the sea, or make the 
next trip by land! 

The only means available by sea would be the 
partially damaged boat, which was seventy-five 
miles away, and plans were considered either to 
bring it to the Cataract by boat, or to repair it 
where it lay ; either course had its disadvantages. 

One day the stranger wandered over to the 
workshop where Harry was engaged. He had 
never been inquisitive, as nothing seemed to in- 
terest or appeal to him. When he saw the machin- 
ery, the lathe, and, finally, the electric battery, he 
stood still and gazed. Slowly he made his way to 
the battery which had the terminal wires lying 


164 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


loose. He picked them up, and brought the ends 
together, and the spark seemed to fascinate him. 
The experiment Vas repeated several times, but 
the wires were soon dropped, and he resumed his 
usual demeanor. 

Harry ran over to the laboratory, and informed 
the Professor, who came at once, and arrived just 
as he was dropping the wires. 

“The best thing for him is something to do. 
In this way, the association with tools, if he has 
any knowledge of them, may awaken some recol- 
lections of his past. I have watched him for the 
past three days and I am sure he is not deranged, 
in the sense of being demented. Let us try what 
employment will do.” 

Harry was engaged in dressing a board with a 
plane when the man came in. The Professor led 
him to the bench and placed a plane in his hand, 
and by making a motion with his hand and push- 
ing the man’s hand along with the plane, he took 
notice of the motion and mechanically drew the 
plane back and forth. 

He not only planed the board, but he followed 
up the roughened parts and finished the job in a 
workmanlike manner. The saw was placed in his 
hands, and he handled this with a facility that sur- 
prised both of them. He did not look like a 
mechanic, but on the other hand had every ap- 
pearance of a literary man, but he was, unques- 
tionably, used to tools. 

After considering the all-important question of 
the exploring expedition, which subject was an 
ever present one, it was agreed that the wisest 
course would be a trip by land. They now knew 


THE STEANGE VISITOE 


165 


the location of the inhabitants of the island, and 
with proper equipment, they ought to be able prop- 
erly to defend themselves. Mother element 
which might prove of value to them was the new 
acquisition in the man who had come so unac- 
countably to their home. 

One of the first things necessary was to give 
him some name by which he could be known, and 
which he would in time recognize. This was de* 
bated over and over, without coming to any con- 
clusion. Eventually, in the absence of anything 
better, it was decided to call him simply John. 

When Harry went to the shop where he was at 
work, he addressed him as John; and at the utter- 
ing of the word started, as though he had been 
alarmed. Harry noticed it, and repeated the name 
several times, with the same result, and he hast- 
ened to inform the Professor of this experience. 
The Professor went down without delay, and it 
was evident from the actions of the man that he 
recalled something familiar in the name, as in 
every instance he would put his hands to his head 
and give an inquiring look. 

‘Tt is my impression that John is his name, as 
he would be more likely to remember that than 
anything else connected with his life. Let us keep 
him occupied, and his work may also be the means 
of bringing back familiar things.” 

The boys, in company with John, set about pre- 
paring a good bed for the newcomer, and he took 
a part in it most heartily, and seemed to under- 
stand when the Professor pointed to him and the 
bed that it was intended for him. 

The interest was more intense when he was 
taken to the boathouse, which Harry had opened, 


166 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


and when he saw the boats, his eyes opened wide 
and grew brighter, bnt they suddenly lost their 
color and he relapsed into his former state. 

It was truly pitiful to watch him, and when in 
the evening they sat together and conversed, they 
felt that at times he must have gotten some 
glimpses of his individuality. 

In the morning when George went out to the 
cattle pens to milk, he mechanically grasped a 
pail and followed, and the milking operation 
seemed to be a familiar one to him. Thus, he was 
a mystery, for the reason that he seemed to be 
at home in every direction where it called for any 
special activity. This was made the more mysti- 
fying when, during the next day, he wandered over 
to the laboratory, and his eyes caught sight of the 
skulls and the skeletons which were on exhibition. 

He walked over to the skulls, and picking up 
one poised it on his hand, slowly turning it 
around, as though trying to discover what it 
meant. The one selected had one side partially 
crushed, and this attracted his attention. He 
placed the fingers of the other hand in the shat- 
tered part, and seemed to realize that some agency 
must have caused it. The whole deportment while 
examining it was that of one who was called, upon 
to make an examination of it for the purpose of 
determining the cause of the injury. 

When he laid it down, he looked at the Profes- 
sor, who quietly took up the skull and pointed to 
the fracture, endeavoring by his conversation to 
strike a word or keynote by which some recollec- 
tion would be started ; but he was mute and soon 
again became listless. 



^‘The professor walked toward him and held out his hand^* 


[See p. 158] 










^'K ^C' ^ : y 

Sfrfei' W»ims - 'W^’- ’■■'i-i 


= IVif 



- 1 


^n. Ill 

■«c> - ' t 


4 « 


^rf. v..vo^,„ ... , ^ . 

'^' i :vt: M<j^' • "•’^ ■ ': 

’* %J '*'<1 *. '^'*fk • A 

^ t>' ''t ^ “'V*' ' 

'(?'''^*ii ' ‘J' ''^*jc‘'' 

If ' ‘ -■ • -'^ J ‘ -• • ^* 

>. • ♦ ♦ WJ *V > 


*♦ ■■•*»■ * iu' T '■ 



L’ ■ * ■ ''• S- 


^• r •■“ ’■.•i ■*•- • fe''*' 


Am 






^'i-t ;.-; ■ . J' ' 

";fr - V « ^ ■’ ' ^ 

M .A . ■' ''• ^ ‘ lu Lh 

« V 'r^ , ' * ♦ •! . ' ,■ 







’^ o* '»* - 


^ -• 
a ^ '<KV' 

Vi*' .IV . ■ . 



MB 


’Jii. 



^ a . «S» - 


«'tt4 ftAT^ IwTl 




in '. . ■ 'a* 



CHAPTER XIV 


AN EXCITING TEIP TO THE FALLS 

The food supply was now the first thing to 
consider, as all necessaries in the way of vege- 
tables, as well as meats, had been exhausted when 
they started on the last trip, and a new lot had 
to be laid in. The matter of butter was always 
a hard problem to take care of, and George re- 
ferred to this difficulty, and before they sailed 
away the Professor told him that, on their return, 
the first thing to do would be the construction of 
a machine which would simplify the production of 
the butter. 

“As we are going to use more butter, I think it 
would be a good thing to start in on our cream 
separator,” said George, who, while he was not an 
adept, like Harry, to devise the things required, 
was always ready to suggest things that could be 
made to advantage. 

“I know that Harry will be very glad to set to 
w’ork on that, so we might as well commence,” 
answered the Professor. 

“What is the principle of the separator that 
causes the cream to break away from the milk?” 

“Centrifugal motion is employed to bring it 
about.” 

“But how does that motion affect it?” 

“When you put a ball on an elastic and swing 
it about your head in a circle, the elastic stretches 
in proportion to the speed at which you swing it. 

167 


168 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 

You have probably seen it done. It is stretched 
in proportion to its weight, also. These two 
things, therefore, are properties of centrifugal 
motion. Cream is the fatty portion of the milk. 
It is contained in little globules, and when the milk 
is allowed to stand, the milk surrounding the 
globules, being heavier than the cream, forces its 



way to the bottom, and the cream by that means 
goes to the top. The inventor has taken advan- 
tage of this fact by making a machine which will 
take the milk and impart to it a very high cen- 
trifugal motion, and in doing so the milk particles, 
on account of their greater weight, force their 
way outwardly and the cream inwardly. The ma- 
chine is also so arranged that the cream and milk 


AN EXCITING TKIP 


169 


are drawn from it at separate points, and this 
operation is a continuous one.” 

Harry quickly understood the machine from the 
drawing made for his guidance, and in Figure 28 
a sketch is made, showing how it was constructed. 

A frame was made which had a base (A) and 
two standards or uprights (B, B), and betwe^in 
these uprights were a pair of horizontal bars 
(C, C). These bars served as supports for a ver- 
tical tube (D), the tube being journaled in the 
center of the cross bars, so that it extended above 
and below the bars, and had a small pulley (E) 
between them. 

Below the lower cross bar the vertical tube has 
two radiating tubes (F, F), closed at their outer 
ends, but communicating with the bore (G) of the 
tube (D) by means of two orifices (H, H). The 
bore (G) extends down to a point a little below 
the orifices (H, H), and a small tube (I) runs 
through the tube D, within the tubes F, F, the 
ends of the tube being open. A duct ( J) centrally 
through the tubular piece (D) communicates with 
the bore of the tube I. One each side of the tube 
D is a little tube (K), which communicates with 
the inner end of each tube (F). A receptacle (L) 
is attached to the tube D below each tube (K), to 
catch the cream. 

The operation of the machine is as .follows : 
AVhen milk is poured into the top of the tube B, 
and the latter is set to rotate at a high speed, it 
passes down and out through the ducts (H, H), into 
the horizontal tubes (F, F), with the result that 
the cream is prevented by the heavier milk from 
reaching the outer open ends of the tube I. As 


170 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


a result, only the milk passes inwardly through 
the inner tube, and is discharged downwardly 
through the duct (J), whereas the cream passes 
out through the small tubes (K). 

The quest for a supply of vegetables was now 
a part of the daily occupation of some in the 
colony, as the garden had not yet advanced to 
that stage where anything could be gotten from it. 
One morning John was missing, and there was a 
great deal of speculation as to his disappearance. 

Before noon he reappeared, carrying in his 
arms as large a quantity of vegetables as he could 
carry. Harry was the first to see and welcome 
him. He recognized beets and was delighted to 
find that John understood what they were after. 
When the Professor was informed, he gave a 
hearty welcome, and John seemed to recognize 
that his efforts were appreciated. 

‘^Ah ! I see you have some onions,” he said, as 
he beamed on him. 

‘‘Onions !” 

“Yes ; the wild onion, the progenitor of all the 
onions. One variety of this is a species called 
chives, used as a salad, and is known throughout 
Europe under that name.” 

“But this beet is very small ; is it also wild ?” 

“There are four varieties of the beet. This is 
the most common of them all, and grows in a wild 
state in many parts of the world. The Mangel- 
wurzel is a larger beet, and coarser, and is much 
used for cattle feed. If you want to give your 
cows a treat, this would be the food to give them. 
Then there is a kind called the chard, also a good 
variety. If possible, we should try and get John 


AN EXCITING TEIP 


171 


to show us where he found them. Undoubtedly 
it was along the sandy part of the island.’’ 

The first real surprise manifested by John was 
when the yaks were hitched up and he was invited 
to join them on a trip. His eyes seemed to show 
some glimmer of intelligence when he slowly 
crawled up into the wagon. Their course was 
directed toward the forest to the west, and the 
trip there, which occupied nearly two hours, was a 
constant source of pleasure to all. 

On the way the animals were stopped at in- 
tervals to allow the Professor and George to col- 
lect specimens of plants and to seek for ores. 
And here occurred the first real symptoms of re- 
turning consciousness on the part of John. As 
the Professor was moving toward a hill, with a 
small pick, he was seen to pick up one of the little 
hammers and follow. 

Without seeming to notice either of the party, 
he undertook to explore on his own account, mov- 
ing here and there along the hillside and occasion- 
ally stopping to examine and chip otf samples, 
which he carefully laid down, but when this was 
done, entirely forgot to collect them. The act 
of procuring the samples seemed to be the absorb- 
ing element. He thus went on, never returning to 
the places where they were deposited. 

‘‘That action on his part shows a remarkable 
phase of his malady. Notice how carefully he 
puts them do^vn and how uniformly he forgets 
that he has done so. The mind, in his condition, 
is so disordered that it cannot reason with any 
degree of sequence. He recalls only one thing at 
a time ; but if I am not mistaken, he is a man of 


172 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


culture, and his every act shows that he was a 
man of broad intellect. I hope we shall be able 
to restore him to his normal condition.” 

The guns had been taken along, as usual, in 
order to do some hunting, and while the Pro- 
fessor and John were engaged in prospecting, the 
boys were after game, in which they were more 
than ordinarily successful, the bag for the first 
hour being a half dozen pheasants and several 
squirrels. 

When the Professor returned to the wagon with 
several loads of samples which the two had gath- 
ered, George insisted on penetrating the forest 
still farther, their direction being toward the falls 
in South River. Before long they came across the 
trail which had been taken by the yaks when they 
made their flight some three months before. They 
were now not to exceed two miles from the falls. 

Angel, who was with them, now began one of 
his peculiar chattering exhibitions which betok- 
ened alarm, and the yaks exhibited a restless dis- 
position. Harry moved forward to ascertain the 
cause, and before he had gone two hundred feet, 
saw the cause of the disturbance. It was one of 
the largest bears which they had so far seen, 
standing alongside of a large fallen tree and vig- 
orously working his immense paws. 

He ran back to the party and gave the informa- 
tion, and the Professor seized a gun, but John in- 
stinctively, as it were, grasped one of the spears 
and darted forward in the direction Harry had 
taken. The bear paid no attention to the party, 
and when the Professor came up, he said : “How 
fortunate it is that we shall be under obligations 


AN EXCITING TEIP 


173 


to the bears for our second treat of honey. I do 
not think we ought to attack him after rendering 
us this service.” 

John was restrained from going forward, and 
he cast a peculiar glance toward the Professor. 
^Tf there is honey there,” replied George, eagerly, 
^det us drive him away, at any rate.” 

But Bruin would not be driven away. He 
sprang down from the log, growling and pacing 
back and forth. Occasionally he would leap back 
on the log. It was plain that he was after the 
honey and regarded it as his special property. 

‘^Well, George, suppose you give him a shot as 
a reminder that we need some of that honey?” 

He needed no urging, and taking a rest along- 
side a sapling, fired a shot with one of the long 
guns. The shot was answered by a terrific growl, 
which ended in a prolonged roar. Without wait- 
ing for another summons, he made a line for 
George, who ran back. This was more than John 
could stand, who now ran directly to the bear with 
his sole weapon, the spear. 

Neither of them could restrain him, but all 
sprang after him. It was a challenge the bear 
sought, and John did not in the least check him-,, 
self until within ten feet of the animal, when, with 
a light spring to one side, he directed the spear 
against the side of the bear as he passed in his 
rush. While the spear entered the animal, it did 
not reach a vital spot. 

Harry was about to fire, but the Professor held 
up a hand. ^^Have a care, unless you are able to 
control yourself well. You are likely to hit John.” 
The bear turned, but John made no motion to 


174 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


avoid him, and again the bear charged. This time 
John did not jump aside to exceed two feet, and 
again plunged the spear forward, and as the 
bear’s lumbering body moved forward fully ten 
feet or more before he could bring himself to a 
halt, they saw that the spear had broken off, and 
the terrific growl of the animal showed how badly 
he had been wounded. 

John made no effort to escape, although he 
plainly saw the broken end of the weapon, and 
the Professor, surprising as it may seem, did not 
encourage a shot. The effect of the last stab was 
apparent, however, as Bruin did not turn after 
the last attack, but, with an expiring growl, sank 
down. 

He was a magnificent specimen. The Professor 
went up to John and held out his hand in recog- 
nition of his wonderful feat, and he seemed to 
realize the nature of the commendation bestowed 
on him. 

The work of skinning the animal was partici- 
pated in by all. John seemed to enjoy it, and by 
his actions showed that he was at home in this 
sort of work. You may be sure that his actions 
throughout the day were such as to give him a 
warm place in their hearts, and they recognized 
what a valuable ally had come to them. 

The excitement made them forget the honey 
tree. They were recalled to that by Angel. He 
had made his way there after the battle ended, 
and was now in the seventh heaven of delight, 
and when George arrived to take possession, 
Angel was covered with a mass of the delicious 
sweet and fairly gorging himself. 


AN EXCITING TEIP 


175 


As no provision had been made for carrying 
the honey home, the boys remembered the first 
attempt at conveying it, and after the skin had 
been removed, it was taken to the hive, and it was 
a pleasure to all to remove the comb and every 
part of the coveted treasure. A luncheon was 
prepared, and for the first time in two months the 
use of their sugar was dispensed with. 

‘As we are so near the falls, why not go there, 
and possibly the sight of it may recall something 
to Johnf^ 

George and Harry looked at the Professor for 
an inkling of his reason for the remark, but he 
appeared not to notice them. 

As the distance was not great, the course was 
directed along the very trail that the runaway 
yaks had taken from the river some months be- 
fore. The moment the river was reached, John 
sprang from the wagon and made his way to the 
shore and stood there gazing, and as his eyes 
turned to the right and he saw the falls, he slowly 
turned to the Professor, as though he was about 
to say something, but there the quest of his eyes 
ended, and all recollection seemed to leave him. 

George could not restrain himself any longer. 
“Why did you make the remark that it would be 
well to bring John here to see whether or not he 
would be able to remember anything!’’ 

“I was anxious to see if he would recognize the 
stream, and possibly recall the boat.” 

“What boat!” 

“The boat we left here.” 

“And do you think John took the boat!” 

“It is my opinion he took the boat, and then 


176 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


forgot it. During that lapse it was washed down 
to the sea by the flood.” 

‘‘But how do you account for the oars and the 
rope which we found in it?” 

“He must have put them there.” 

“Where do you suppose he got the oars and the 
rope ?” 

“That is the peculiar part of the problem. The 
rope, if you will remember, looked as though it 
was made by savages. At any rate, it was not a 
regulation rope; but the oars were undoubtedly 
taken from the Investigator’s lifeboat.” 

This was interesting news to the boys. It did 
seem probable, after all, that John had something 
to do with the lifeboat as well as their own boat. 


CHAPTER XV 

THE STORY OF THE CAVE 

An hour or more was spent on the shore of the 
river, passing along its banks and investigating 
the proximity of the falls, but if there was a glim- 
mer of intelligence, John did not exhibit it. All 
realized this one thing: that if his memory could 
be brought to its normal condition, he would be 
able, undoubtedly, to reveal some of the mys- 
teries they longed to unravel. For all they knew, 
he might have been one of the crew of the Investi- 
gator, but this, after all reflections, was out of the 
question, because life on shipboard is rather in- 
timate, and boys, above all others, are most likely 
to remember faces. 

Neither had the slightest knowledge of ever 
having seen him, and it was now felt that they 
must await the time when he would again regain 
his consciousness by the orderly course of nature. 

While on the way home, George, who was seated 
by the Professor, mused over the occurrences of 
the day. “It has always been a wonder to me to 
know why it is that humanity must always be 
surrounded by a mystery of some sort. It seems 
there is always something just beyond him, and 
he must struggle and work to find it out. Why 
is it!” 

“You have asked the great question of the ages. 
It is an eternal question. Why should man know 
everything! That would be omnipotence. If you 
177 


178 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


stop to consider, it will occur to you that the mo- 
ment man knows everything he ceases to be a 
man. All energy, all effort, and every instinct in 
life fades away. The association of man with 
man would cease. Take the simple act of one lady 
calling on another. Ho you think it is merely to 
look at her friend, or is it done to make some 
inquiry? Every action in life has in it some de- 
sire to acquire something, to get that which man 
did not possess before. The quest for the things 
of this life become and are the great pleasures 
which man enjoys. It is not their possession. 
Men pursue pleasure. That is a seeking after 
something just as much as hunting for wealth.’^ 

Returning to their home, the samples which 
the Professor and John had gathered were care- 
fully taken to the laboratory, and several of the 
large copper receptacles cleaned for the honey. 
This was the part which Angel enjoyed more than 
anything else. And here it may be remarked that, 
when John was installed, Angel was a little shy 
with the stranger, but gradually became accus- 
tomed to his presence. Somehow John could not 
fully understand the creature, and often would be 
seen following his motions; but within a week 
Angel would permit himself to be caressed with- 
out objection, and he seemed to know that no harm 
could come from the kindly faced man. 

Notwithstanding the mystery of their new 
friend, there could be but one course to follow. 
They lived on the island and were a part of it. 
The longing to know what the other side of the 
island contained was an ever-constant inquiry. 


THE STORY OF THE CAVE 179 


Something must be done to forward their efforts 
in that direction. 

During the four weeks at home a good supply 
of provisions had been gathered, and now the 
plans were made for an overland journey. The 
wrecked boat was still near the mouth of West 
River. It would be a week^s trip to bring it home, 
and this was not considered advisable, particu- 
larly as the monsoons were still blowing, with 
greater or less violence and frequency. 

It may well be imagined that the boys had not 
forgotten the cave. It was their constant talk by 
day and their dreams at night. It had a fascina- 
tion which was constantly drawing them in that 
direction, but, singularly, they never entered it. 
But one day George suggested that they make a 
search on their own account. Harry quickly as- 
sented, and taking up the two lamps, together with 
their weapons, were soon at the entrance. 

They cautiously went down the stone steps and 
directed their way to the recess where the treas- 
ure was deposited. The skeletons had been buried 
on a previous visit, so they did not have that grim 
recollection to ponder over. 

What interested them most was the chamber 
to the east which had been examined by the Pro- 
fessor, and to that they made their way. During 
the first two hundred feet the direction was to 
the east, or nearly so, and then the walls suddenly 
turned to the right, and here a sight met their 
eyes w^hich bewildered them. 

The chamber was a gorgeous one, not so large 
as the one in which the pirates had their booty, 
but the calcareous hangings on the walls were far 


180 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


superior and possessed greater decorative effect. 
From a point near the center of the cavern, they 
turned and examined all sides, and to the south 
was what appeared to be an outlet, and this was 
approached. 

They moved nearer with a silent tread, as 
though fearing the ghosts of the past century 
would rise to receive them. They saw a recess, 
cut like a room in the side of the walls, symmetri- 
cal in form, and fitted with all the comforts and 
luxuries that humanity could wish, but it was 
crumbled, and crumbling, and everything fell at 
the touch. 

Here, scattered about, were the remains of a 
table, and among its crumbled ruins were gold 
and silver vessels. There was a mass of debris, 
among which could be recognized articles of hu- 
man manufacture and use, but all covered with 
the everlasting carbonate of lime, which gave it 
the color of death and the shroud of a sepulcher. 

Not a word was spoken. They moved from 
place to place and touched the objects. What 
appeared to have some resemblance of a rigid 
form fell away, just as they had seen it in the 
other portion of the cave. What surprised them 
most was the entire absence of any firearms, al- 
though they remembered that the Professor had 
said the other portions of the cave would show 
that the pirates had plenty of guns. 

This incited them to further search. Could it 
be possible that the Professor had not seen this 
part of the cave ? Their own tracks could be made 
out in the soft stalagmites on the floor, and re- 
tracing their steps to the center of the chamber. 


THE STORY OF THE CAVE 181 

they searched back and forth to determine whether 
or not he had visited this portion. 

Nothing was found to satisfy them on this 
point, but, passing on beyond the first recess en- 
tered, they were amazed to find a second grottoed 
recess, similar to the first, but much longer, and 
here, with merely a wall separating them from 
the other recess, was an orgy of bones and 
weapons. 

It was such an unlooked-for sight that they 
almost staggered at the scene. At one side was a 
row of chests, fully six feet long, all white and 
crumbling, and these were filled with the long 
Spanish guns of which they had several specimens. 

Here everything was in confusion. The final 
act in the drama enacted here, whether before or 
after the battle in the other chamber, bore evi- 
dences of annihilation. Here were skeletons, 
locked in their dying embraces, still grasping cut- 
lasses with which they closed the act. But what 
interested them more than anything else were 
four skeletons, reclining on a raised portion, 
with chains on wrists and ankles, which looked 
like a mockery in their surroundings. 

The captives had taken no part in the strug- 
gles. Were they being defended? and who were 
the captors? The boys had no time to consider 
these things. Other matters attracted them. The 
nook close by was a veritable arsenal. It con- 
tained chests which, undoubtedly, were filled with 
gold. The sights, their surroundings, the evi- 
dences of untold treasure everywhere were enough 
to unnerve them for the time, and George, with a 
voice almost hoarse, suggested that it would be 


182 MYSTEEIES OP THE CAVERNS 


well to return. It was some time before they 
could make their way back to the entrance, and 
when it was reached, they sat down, not knowing 
what to say or what interpretation to put on the 
last discovery. 

Nothing was said to the Professor about the 
visit to the cave. It must be confessed that they 
felt a little sheepish about this, as such a thing 
as deceiving the Professor was farthest from 
their thoughts, but there was no concerted agree- 
ment to keep him in the dark. Either would have 
scorned to enter into such an agreement. 

The boys were more than surprised that even- 
ing when the Professor brought out some of the 
treasures he had brought from the cave and ex- 
hibited them. Among them was a crude imple- 
ment of stone, which had the appearance of a cut- 
ting instrument. Another was a small stone 
vessel, unmistakably showing human manufacture. 

The sight of these did not, at first, interest the 
boys, but when the Professor stated that the cave 
was undoubtedly of very ancient origin, George 
could not resist the inevitable question, ‘‘How can 
that be determined?” 

“In the study of paleontology an effort has been 
made to classify the different periods of man’s 
life on the planet, so that we have the stone age, 
which is the earliest, the bronze age, and the age 
of iron.” 

“How far back in the history of the world has 
evidence been found of the existence of man?” 

“In the chalk cliffs of England, and also in like 
formations in Germany, skulls have been found 


THE STOEY OP THE CAVE 183 

which indicate an existence back to a period fully 
500,000 years ago.’’ 

^‘What reason is there to assume that if they 
were found in those chalk deposits, that they must 
have been that far back?” 

^‘Because it was fully that long ago in the period 
of the world formation when the chalk beds were 
made, and this seems to be conclusive evidence of 
great antiquity.” 

^Ts it not singular that more evidence of that 
condition is not found than the recovery of a few 
bones?” 

‘‘Not when it is considered that the earth is con- 
stantly undergoing change, first in one place and 
then in another. Have you ever heard of the 
great continent, which was supposed to be lost in 
mid- Atlantic, called Atlantis? Plato refers to it, 
and attributes the first knowledge of it as coming 
from Solon, who visited Egypt and there learned 
from the wise men that a great country, to the 
west of the Pillars of Hercules, which Gibraltar 
was called in ancient times, had disappeared thou- 
sands of years before; and they further informed 
the great Grecian lawgiver that the earth had 
been peopled and repeopled many times before in 
ages past.” 

“Why was it necessary to repeople the earth? 
Were they all destroyed?” 

“They pointed out that at certain stages of the 
world’s history great floods came and destroyed 
all the people inhabiting the low places, and at 
other times the terrific volcanic eruptions de- 
stroyed those who lived in the hills, and at other 
times entire continents, like Atlantis, disappeared. 


184 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

so that the earth had to be repeopled and the arts 
and sciences learned over anew/’ 

It is wonderful to relate how the life on the 
island affected the health of all. They lived out- 
doors and had plenty of sunshine and vigorous 
exercise. In the laboratory, the Professor made 
it a constant habit to do all his work in the sun- 
light, to which he exposed himself at all times. 
The boys often spoke of this, and one day, while 
talking on the subject, he remarked: 

^Tt is surprising how little the majority of peo- 
ple value sunlight. It is not the visible sunlight 
that performs the wonders in giving strength to 
man. If you recall, we spoke about the actinic 
rays which cause the chemical changes on the 
photographic plate. It is those unseen rays which 
produce the aurora borealis, exert a curative 
effect upon leprosy and tuberculosis, fill the at- 
mosphere on the sunny side of a street with oxy- 
gen and nitrogen, and do many other marvelous 
things.” 

‘Tn what manner does the invisible light pro- 
duce these results?” 

^Tn its sparkling radiations microbes die, decay 
ceases, the iron in the blood becomes chemically 
strong; ozone is manufactured from the dirt and 
dust, which are also destroyed; the perspiration 
becomes active and carries off waste from the 
muscles and cleanses the skin; dead tissues are 
purified and the muscles invigorated; and all life 
is made to thrive.” 

‘‘Does the sunlight have the same effect on all 
the animal creations?” 


THE STOEY OF THE CAVE 185 


^^This is true of all animate life, except minute 
organisms, or what are called bacteria.” 

‘Tf that is the case, why do worms and the like 
hide themselves in the earth?” 

^Tn that case it is the instinct of self-preserva- 
tion. The most of them are eyeless, so that sun- 
light exposes them to birds and other enemies. 
Professor Mast demonstrated that they are very 
favorably influenced by exposure to sunlight. Dr. 
Dolly has shown, by a series of very brilliant ex- 
periments, that the butterfly will live three times 
longer in sunlight than in the shadow; and Pro- 
fessor Yerkes has also proven that the jellyfish, 
while inactive in the dark, becomes very strenuous 
in sunlight.” 

‘Tf that is the case, why wouldn’t it be a good 
thing to have all houses made of glass?” 

‘‘That is really what has been proposed. The 
Government of the United States has set a good 
example in this respect by devoting over one-half 
of the space of the new post-office building in 
Washington to an arrangement which permits the 
interior to be flooded with sunlight.” 

In the really strenuous times which our colo- 
nists had passed through the pleasures of fishing 
had been forgotten, and as that was an article of 
food which all relished, and of which they had 
been deprived for some time, Harry insisted that 
at least a portion of the following day should be 
spent in that way. 

John saw the preparations which were going 
on and entered into the spirit of it in his usual 
listless way, but it must be said that there was 


186 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


now more eagerness in his actions than had been 
theretofore noticed. 

All saw the change that was perceptibly com- 
ing over him, and the particular thing that George 
noticed was the character of the eye. ‘T wish you 
would explain, Professor, why it is that the eyes 
of people so affected are dull, and that when they 
recover the eye becomes bright?” 

‘^That change in the character of the eye is ex- 
pressed by everyone under certain conditions. 
How much brighter the eye is when you are 
affected by laughter. That is due to the duct 
which lubricates the eyeball. Anything pleasant 
causes an undue amount of discharge, so that the 
eyeball glistens, and we call it looking bright. The 
same principle holds good in the case of one who 
is dull or listless, or, as in our friend^s case, has 
nothing to stimulate the flow of the secretions. 
The moment he is affected, this is shown on the 
eyeball sooner than by any other part of his 
body.” 

It will be remembered that in a former volume 
it was stated how Harry had prepared a number 
of very creditable fishjiooks, and these were now 
attached to the ramie fiber cord and suitable poles 
were easily obtained for the day^s outing. 

Aside from John, it was a merry party that 
left the Cataract that morning, and Angel was 
among them. Several good fishing spots were 
known, but the Professor suggested that a change 
be made and that the trial for the day should be 
in the river below the Cataract, in the hope that 
larger and gamer fish might l)e found. In all 
former trials only the tame fish were caught. 


THE STOEY OF THE CAVE 187 

Less than a quarter of a mile below the Cata- 
ract, and close to the mouth of the river, was a 
small cove, with deep water, bounded by a sandy 
shore. Here the party stopped and cast their 
lines. The Professor, however, used a fly and 
fished with it at the surface of the water. As on 
the previous occasion, he was the first to land a 
magnificent specimen, which was so large that he 
had difficulty in landing it. 

‘^What is that beauty 

‘Tt is a salmon ; or it might be more correct to 
call it a salmon-trout. Trout belong to the sal- 
mon family, and they are all game.” 

‘^Well, he certainly made a fight for it.” 

“Does the salmon live in salt as well as in fresh 
water?” 

“They have a habit of remaining otf the coast 
in salt water during the winter months in north- 
ern latitudes, and then entering the rivers when 
the spawning season begins, ascending the rivers 
slowly, despite every obstacle that may be put in 
their way. When they reach a favorite spot, the 
eggs are laid and are hatched out in countless 
numbers.” 

“Has it been discovered why they do this ?” 

“In order to escape their enemies, who seek the 
eggs. Even with the care which they take in 
breeding, millions are destroyed, and it has been 
estimated that if all the eggs laid were hatched 
out the number would be so great as to prevent 
navigation along the shores of the coasts where 
they thrive. In the rivers of Oregon and Wash- 
ington the shoals of salmon are frequently so 


188 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


great in the rivers as to make it impossible for a 
boat to be navigated through them.” 

Harry was awarded with the second catch, 
which was fully fifteen inches in length. It had 
a nearly cylindrical body, covered with exception- 
ally large scales, and its head above convex. The 
striking thing about it was the color, the back 
being of a bottle-green, light on the sides, and 
silvery white underneath. 

The Professor was on hand at once. “You have 
captured a fine specimen of the mullet, not con- 
sidered, generally, as a game fish. It is a par- 
ticularly fine table fish.” 

George came in for his share of luck, as well as 
John, who seemed to enjoy the sport immensely. 
His eyes showed that. It was a pleasure to all at 
this opportunity to bring something into the life 
of the poor unfortunate so that he might be 
brought back to light again. 


CHAPTER XVI 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 

During the evening George suggested that as 
the trip was to be overland it might he wise to 
can some of the fish, or to use some of the recep- 
tacles found in the cave for this purpose. 

‘‘We might do that,” said the Professor, “or 
they might be salted down, and that would not 
necessitate the receptacles, if we dried them.” 

The salted fish did not appeal to either of the 
boys, and it was accordingly agreed to put up 
several packages for food. 

“Will it be much trouble to preserve them by 
putting them in cans?” 

“If proper precautions are taken they can be 
preserved. The difficulty is that the air is not 
excluded, and the mischief is caused by the gases 
which form, in that case, and when the pressure 
becomes too great the receptacle bursts.” 

“Why are the fish, or other substances, so 
canned heated and put into the cans while in that 
state ?” 

“When a can is filled with the material in a 
heated state it has been expanded to its highest 
point, and after the package is sealed properly, no 
air can enter it, so that it is prevented from chang- 
ing its condition by any chemical action. Our dif- 
ficulty will be to get a proper metal for the cans.” 

“What is the best to use?” 

189 


190 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


“Tin, for the reason that tin is not affected by 
any of the acids which are formed by fish or by 
fruit, which may be put in them.’’ 

It has been stated that the boys were both 
musically inclined, and George had taken several 
courses of lessons on the violin before he joined 
the training ship. If there was anything more 
than another that was missed, particularly in the 
evenings, it was the lack of musical instruments, 
to which all had been accustomed. As a result, 
the boys had for some time worked on a violin, 
which was now nearing completion, and they hoped 
it could be finished before the start was made. 

The Professor discovered the partly constructed 
violin, and at once showed his appreciation of 
their enterprise. “Now that you have the body, 
what are you going to do for strings?” and he 
laughed at the bewildered look. They had for- 
gotten the one essential thing. 

Without a word, he left them, and when he re- 
turned, held in his hand a dozen or more hard, 
bony-like and dried-up reeds. “Possibly these will 
do for your purpose.” 

“What are they?” 

“These are the intestines of the wildcat we shot 
about ten months ago.” 

“Well, aren’t they as good as the intestines of 
the common cat?” 

“Undoubtedly; but violin strings are not pro- 
duced from that source.” 

“Aren’t they known as catgut?” 

“That is true ; but it is a mistake. The strings 
of commerce are made principally from the intes- 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 191 

tines of sheep, and, singularly, have been always 
designated as ^catgut.’ Other articles from the 
same source are hatters’ bowstrings, clockmakers’ 
cords, and thongs for whips and laces for boots.” 

‘^What are the best kinds of strings for musical 
instruments f ’ 

^^Those obtained from Milan, Italy, are consid- 
ered the best, on account of their transparency 
and exceeding strength. Most frequently each 
string is made up of two or three separate strands, 
twisted together with the utmost care. But there 
is another use of the greatest value, and that is 
as a thread for sewing up wounds in internal sur- 
gery, because, being of animal matter, the thread 
will, in course of time, be absorbed into the sys- 
tem, and thus remove itself, without requiring a 
second operation to remove it from the wound.” 

“How is it prepared to make it suitable for our 
purpose!” 

“The ones here I thoroughly cleaned at the time, 
as I knew they would come in handy for particu- 
lar purposes, but I had no idea of this kind in 
view at the time. We must soak them and remove 
the inner and outer lining. Potash, in solution, 
is best for the purpose. We must then draw them 
through small holes, to give them uniformity, and 
keep them in a receptacle which is tilled with sul- 
phur fumes. That is for the purpose of fumigat- 
ing them. They are then ready for the instru- 
ment. I think the different sizes will give you a 
variety.” 

The directions were carried out, and during the 
following week the violin was prepared for its 


192 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

initial test. The Professor was pleased with the 
knowledge that the instrument was ready. It was 
plain that he expected important results from that 
source with John. It is well known that music 
possesses a wonderful power in the treatment of 
demented people, and he was very anxious to try 
it in the case of one who had lost all memory. 

On the evening appointed the violin was brought 
in, and the boys had arranged a program. Harry 
had a fine baritone voice, while George could take 
a high note and sustain it as well as most sopranos. 
When all the preliminaries had been arranged, 
the instrument was produced, and after a little 
preliminary tuning, George played ‘‘America.” 

At the first strains of the violin, Angel, who 
was in the loft, came down. He didn’t stop to 
notice anyone but George. This was something 
so unheard of that he appeared to be hypnotized, 
as he shuffled over to George, and looked up at 
the instrument. He appeared to be entranced, 
and when the music stopped he laid his hand on 
George’s knee, and looked up appealingly. There 
was not a single motion in his features which 
showed appreciation or pleasure or excitement; 
but aside from that every action of his body indi- 
cated exhilaration and undue animation. 

The boys had eyes for the animal only; but the 
Professor watched John to the exclusion of every- 
thing else. WTien the first strains vibrated he 
glanced around, and saw the musician. Prom that 
moment until George dropped the violin his eyes 
never ceased the stare. As the music continued 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 193 

lie appeared to be enraptured, if such a thing could 
be said of a mute expression. 

The Professor drew closer to him, and intently 
watched his eyes, and before the first verse had 
ended the situation was so intense that the Pro- 
fessor’s hand involuntarily beat time, and it was 
evident that the tremulous motion, which Johi^ 
now and then exhibited, was the inward struggle 
for light. 

Without turning from John, when the music 
ceased, he cried out to George, in a suppressed 
tone: ^T^eep on; keep on!” This brought the 
boys to the knowledge of the other drama which 
was being enacted. “Slower, George, slower,” was 
the request of the Professor ; and while “America” 
requires the jubilant strain of action and liberty, 
he obeyed the injunction. 

“Keep it up ; can you play ^Home, Sweet 
Home’?-” George could, and did, and as the 
familiar strains floated through the air, John 
moved forward, his head drooped down, both hands 
grasped the chair and he listened with an intent- 
ness that was painful to witness. 

When George stopped at the whispered sugges- 
tion, John raised his eyes and looked around. The 
look was a different one than they had ever noticed 
before. When he glanced at the Professor, Harry 
said : “Did you notice the difference in his eyes ?” 

He rubbed his hands over his eyes, and stroked 
his head, and they thought a glimmer of a smile 
crossed his features. When they were about to 
retire that night, the Professor could not help but 


194 MYSTEI lES OF THE CAVEENS 


express his gratification at the results achieved 
through the aid of the violin. 

“I could not help thinking how nearly allied 
Angel and John were in the manner of acting dur- 
ing the course of the music. I have no doubt but 
in course of time the animal will, just like John, 
show the facial expressions which characterize 
either pleasure or pain.” 

‘^But I have seen Angel actually laugh.” 

This was true; it had been noticed on several 
occasions. But so far John had not laughed, and 
he had not changed his facial expression in such 
a manner as to make it noticeable, and the even- 
ing’s entertainment had done more to affect him 
than anything which had occurred, and it was 
their earnest hope that this might be a means to 
his delivery. 

Harry was the only one to notice a field mouse 
which had appeared soon after George began to 
play, and the little animal was joined by others, 
but the subsequent events of the evening attracted 
his attention, so that no notice was taken of them 
until they were about to retire, when they scam- 
pered away and Harry then related how they had 
acted. 

^^That is an interesting thing. Some time ago 
the keeper of the Central Park Zoological Gardens, 
in New York, employed a violinist to play for the 
animals, and the results were very interesting. The 
first animals approached were a lioness and five 
cubs. The tune played was ‘^America.” She 
listened with mute and dignified appreciation, and 
her five little cubs ranged up alongside ^in a row, 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 


195 


and in the same attitude, all with a wondering ex- 
pression, and sometimes would act just as you 
often have seen dogs do, turn their heads aside 
obliquely, as though the sound could be better un- 
derstood. The old lion in the adjoining cage also 
stopped his restless movement, and peered at the 
player attentively. The next animal was a tigress. 



When the playing commenced she first looked star- 
tled. Her mate entered the cage and escorted her 
out into the yard while he took up his position and 
listened, and refused to allow her to return. The 
i hippopotamus, on the other hand, got mad, and 
I sought the water for seclusion. The elephant ap- 
i peared to be the most discriminating, for while 
he deliberately turned his back when a plaintive 


196 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


tune was played, was so delighted when a rattling 
dancing jig was executed, he actually danced about 
in ecstacies of joy. The wolves, foxes and hyenas 
could not be made to appreciate any of the tunes, 
but the monkeys enjoyed all the tunes, if being sad 
when doleful tunes are played give happiness, and 
they partook of the exhilaration when lively 
sounds came from the instrument.’’ 

The warm summer days were now at hand, and 
all realized that this was the proper time to carry 
out the long-delayed project of fully exploring the 
western shore of their little continent. This had 
been deferred before John came, in order that 
more complete preparations could be made, and to 
await settled weather, and now that he was here 
further delay had been urged in the hope that 
memory would be restored and thus give them an 
addition that could be depended on. One puz- 
zling feature of his malady was that he under- 
stood, in a measure, what was told him, but it was 
noticed that whatever was spoken had to be ac- 
companied by some manual action. If told to get 
a pail of water, he would remain inactive until a 
pail was taken up or pointed out. So in yoking up 
the yaks, merely pointing at the yokes would be 
sufficient to start the lagging memory. He quickly 
learned to manipulate the guns, and spent hours 
in practicing by shooting at the target. 

Singular as it may seem, he showed some intelli- 
gence at the good shots, but all these flashes were 
momentary only, and it was further noticed that 
he would remember an act performed the day be- 
fore and repeat it in precisely the same way. It 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 


197 


was like an imitative process, and the Professor 
suggested that he was now in the condition of a 
child, learning all things anew, to which was added 
some glimpses of things he had learned before. 

A new wagon was necessary, as the one which 
had been used for the past eight months was 
clumsy and badly worn. All took a part in this im- 
portant work, and it was here that the workman- 
like qualities of John showed themselves. He wa& 
a treasure in this respect. The lathe was a pleas- 
ure to him, and so with bench work, and within 
ten days a new and larger wagon was turned out. 

“I only wish,” said Harry, ‘That we could paint 
it up, and thus make a real finished article out 
of it.” 

“Your idea is a good one, but in order to make 
a lead paint will take too long a time to provide a 
carbonate which will answer the purpose.” 

“Why does it take so long?” 

“We have plenty of lead, but to get the base for 
the paint it will be necessary to cast a lot of thin 
gratings, and use earthen pots, partly filled with 
vinegar. A layer of the lead gratings must then 
be put down and the earthen pot stood on them 
and partly filled with acetic acid, or vinegar. A 
board should cover each pot and spent tannin bark 
placed around them. This must be built up in 
the form of a stack. Fermentation soon sets in, 
and the result will be the formation of carbonic 
acid, and in five or six weeks the metallic lead 
converted into what is called the carbonate which 
may be washed and ground up with oil, and sold 
as the white lead of commerce.” 


198 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


‘Tnstead of that what should we use 

‘‘We have plenty of flax, as you know. From 
that we can make linseed oil, and with a proper 
coloring matter, which is not necessary, however, 
we can provide a paint that will be very service- 
able.’’ 

“Then why not use the madder dye which wc 
made for dyeing the flagf’ 

“Just the thing. In addition we must have a 
dryer of some kind. I suggest that we distil some 
of the rosin, or the sap from the pitch pine trees, 
for that purpose.” 

“What kind of product shall we obtain from 
that?” 

“Turpentine.” 

Thus day after day passed in preparation, each 
hour, almost, suggesting some new addition to 
their stock, which would contribute to protection, 
comfort, or necessity. Among other things sug- 
gested, in order to relieve them as much as possi- 
ble from carrying such a large burden in the way 
of provisions, was the making of synthetic foods. 

George had this in mind for some days before 
he broached the subject to the Professor. “I un- 
derstood you to say that if we had synthetic foods 
we could carry several weeks’ rations about our 
persons, and the load would not be a heavy or per- 
ceptible one at that? If such is the case, why 
can’t we prepare some of the food in that way as 
a matter of precaution? What is the meaning of 
the word ‘synthetic,’ and how is such food made ?” 

“The word is the direct opposite of ‘analyses.’ 
In analyzing, the elements composing any sub- 


MUSIC AND ANIMALS 


199 


stance are separated from each other. In syn- 
thesis the ditferent elements are put together to 
form the substance. Thus, take water as an illus- 
tration: Its component parts are two parts of 
hydrogen and one of oxygen. Knowing this to 
be the case, the chemist takes that many parts of 
oxygen and hydrogen, and by uniting them water 
is formed which is just as much a true water as 
though it fell from the heavens or was taken from 
a well or spring.” 

We should not go far out of the way in stating 
that the Professor was putting in some time in 
this direction, while the other work was going on, 
and this was confirmed later on when he requested 
Harry to furnish a number of small tubes like 
those used for the powder, and it was noticed that 
a quantity of bamboo was taken to the laboratory 
and cut up into short sections. 

The guns and ammunition were now ready, a 
supply of food had been prepared, and George 
insisted on baking a quantity of barley bread, 
which was carefully wrapped up, so that it would 
not be dried out or be liable to get wet. The 
wagon was admirably adapted for the purpose. 
The wheels were not extraordinarily large, but 
they had wide treads, and the body was high at 
the sides so as to serye as a fortress in case of 
trouble. An extra yoke was taken, a supply of 
sugar and also of honey put in the vessels which 
the cave supplied, and only a small store of vege- 
tables, as they depended on finding these en route. 

The start was agreed upon for the following 
morning. Observation Hill was visited, and a new 


200 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


inscription affixed to the pole, so that any passing 
ship might know their plight, and be able to direct 
its course to the west. The value of the chart 
made by the Professor was now appreciated, as 
that was also tacked up in its proper place. 

Jack and Jill were the yaks selected for the 
journey, as they were tried and true, and had now 
grown to be strong and well domesticated. Free- 
dom was given to the cattle, and all the buildings 
closed up. This was done to secure the interiors 
from intrusion on the part of animals. An in- 
scription was also placed on the door of the house. 

Promptly at nine o’clock the company, consist- 
ing of the Professor, Harry, George, John and 
Angel, started on the journey across Wonder Is- 
land. This was their sixth trip, only one of them 
by sea. 

Would this be any more successful than the pre- 
<3eding ones? 


CHAPTER XVII 


THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST 

On the march up Cataract River, and out to- 
ward the forest, the same order was observed as 
on the previous trips. One must lead the way, 
and act as scout, while the others were to remain 
with the team. They did not anticipate much dif- 
ficulty during the first two or three days from 
savages, but it was always well to have some one 
in the lead so as to point out the most desirable 
paths, as it must be remembered they had to make 
their own trails through a wilderness. Much of 
it had been traveled, it is true, but there was noth- 
ing approaching such a thing as a road, or even a 
path, by which they could be guided. 

It was amusing to watch Angel, as he glided 
along from one tree to the next, where the forests 
were in their paths. At other times he would be 
in the wagon, or shamble along, and sometimes 
leap on the backs of the yaks and ride there. The 
patient animals were so used to him that no atten- 
tion was paid to his antics, even though he occa- 
sionally sat on the yoke between the animals. 

John was an interested observer of all the prep- 
arations, and was one of the first to take his place 
alongside of the wagon. When the Professor 
urged him to take a seat he looked up inquiringly, 
but did not comply. The Professor did not urge 
him, but after several hours of walking, he was 
201 


202 MYSTERIES OP THE CAVERNS 


again asked to mount, and he did so, thereby seem- 
ing to understand what was required of him. 

When they camped at noon for the first meal, 
they were still on the banks of the Cataract, but 
here it took a decided turn to the west; and now 
the ‘course for the afternoon must be to the south- 
west so the South River could be reached above 
the falls. 

That river was reached early in the afternoon, 
and they recognized the trail formerly made on 
the first journey along its banks. The first en- 
campment for the night was probably twenty miles 
from home, but the next morning, after they had 
struck into an entirely new section of the island, 
the journey grew more burdensome, as the land 
on both sides of the stream became rough, and in 
many places the small streams crossed offered 
such steep sides that frequent detours had to be 
made to enable the team to get across. 

During the second day they did not, on account 
of this, cover more than ten miles, and near the 
close of the day a second falls was reached, show- 
ing that they were going up to a much higher alti- 
tude. Above the falls the river turned abruptly 
to the south, and within five miles of it the river 
forked, one branch going south and the other 
southwest. 

They were on the branch going west, and that 
course was followed, but still the country was 
rough, and now became thickly wooded, which 
added to the discomfort of traveling with a team. 
Magnificent trees grew on every side, and in most 
places sprang up clear to the water’s edge. 


TEIP THROUGH THE FOREST 203 

“You have here a good illustration,” remarked 
the Professor, “as to the source of the debris 
which is found on the shores of the island. The 
streams carry down the logs, trees and leaves, 
which, after iDeing washed out to sea, are finally 
left along the beaches.” 

Our voyagers had passed many nights in the 
forests before, but this was the first time they 
had come across such impenetrable jungles. The 
large trees were actually so close together at many 
places that the wagon had to be backed and worked 
around for long distances to enable them to make 
any forward movements. 

Before noon of the third day it became so dis- 
couraging that they stopped to consider the situ- 
ation. Possibly a route away from the river 
would be much better, and that course was decided 
on, so that the direction agreed on was west, with 
a slight trend to the north. 

The reason why the course along the river would 
be the most direct was judged from the fact that 
the lights, which they saw from their boat, made 
the location of the savages fully fifty miles or 
over from the northernmost cape where they had 
been cast ashore a few weeks before. 

The travel must, therefore, be to the southwest, 
and not to the west, but at the rate they were 
going, with every hour more difficult, it was hoped 
that the new course would in the end be quicker. 
All of that day the struggle was a strenuous one, 
and when night came all were exhausted, and were 
ready to retire as soon as the meal was over. 

They were in the midst of the thickest forest, 


204 MYSTEKIES OF THE CAVERNS 

and up to tliis time all had retired, as they did on 
this occasion. The yaks were enclosed in a railing 
made of small trees, so as to protect them, and 
the two mattresses within the covered body made 
comfortable beds for all. 

Strange sounds occasionally disturbed them, but 
caused no particular alarm, until Angel began to 
grow restless, about two in the morning. George 
tried to quiet him, but he persisted in giving the 
alarm. Suddenly a howl and a shriek awoke the 
occupants of the wagon and as each arose he in- 
stinctively grasped a weapon. The sounds came 
from two animals, one of which was close by; the 
other at a greater distance. 

‘^The one near us seems to be a wildcat, or an 
animal which utters a characteristic shriek of that 
kind, but I am not sure as to the identity of the 
other animal,” remarked the Professor, as he 
listened intently to the hideous howls and shrieks. 

It was pitch dark, so that it was impossible to 
recognize anything in the wagon, and of course 
the dense forests only added to the gloom, al- 
though the sky could be faintly seen directly above 
them through the scraggly leaves. The Profes- 
sor searched for one of the lanterns, when he heard 
the yaks becoming uneasy, and running back and 
forth in the little enclosure. 

John was awake, and his eyes seemed to have a 
sort of glimmer as the light flared up. The rear 
end of the wagon led directly into the pen where 
the animals were, and no sooner had the light rays 
illuminated the enclosure than a heavy object 


TEIP THEOUGH THE FOEEST 205 


sprang from an adjoining tree and landed on one 
of the yaks. 

The latter was thrown across the pen with the 
impact of the force, and the Professor, who had 
the lamp, could not level his gun, but without 
a moment’s hesitation John’s gun was at his shoul- 
der, and he tired before either of the boys could 
recover themselves in the excitement. 

The firing of the gun seemed to raise pande- 
monium. The sudden appearance of the light, as 
the animal made the leap, disconcerted him, and 
the shot following immediately, caused him to ut- 
ter a terrific growl. John grasped the Professor’s 
gun and shot the second time, and the shot was at 
blank range. The animal gave a slight spring for- 
ward, and fell across a tree trunk which was at 
one side of the enclosure, and on which they had 
arranged the cooking utensils the night before. 

This was exciting enough for one night’s adven- 
ture, but as John and the boys were about to 
descend a crash in the trees to the right caused 
them to halt. The Professor held out his light, 
but the thick wood and the dense underbrush pre- 
vented any examination more than thirty or forty 
feet beyond. 

The eagerness of the boys to return to the wagon 
caused the Professor to loose his grip on the 
lamp, and before he could recover the hold, it 
fell to the ground and was extinguished. The 
yaks appeared to be in a frenzy now, and the 
howling beyond increased in intensity. After a 
search the lamp was relit, and the two others also 
brought out and lighted, and the appearance of 


206 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEKNS 


the light caused a hurried retreat of the howling 
beasts. 

‘Tt is a puma/’ were the Professor’s first words, 
The most enormous specimen I ever saw.” 

^AVell, these woods must be full of them, by the 
way they howled.” 



Puma 


The yaks were calmed down after some effort, 
and it was found that the shoulder of Jack had 
been lacerated by the claws of the puma, but be- 
yond that no damage was done. Both of John’s 
shots had taken effect, and it delighted the Profes- 
sor to point to the wound and then indicate, as best 
he could, how they owed him a debt for his skill. 


TEIP THROUGH THE FOREST 207 


The carcass was dragged out of the enclosure to 
keep the yaks quiet, and when this was done they 
seemed relieved. 

would like to know what the other animal 
was?” 

‘Tt is my opinion that it was a companion to 
this one. They, like all animals, have a means 
for communicating their ideas to each other. 
Some English scientists have found that the hen 
utters twenty-three distinct notes, and that they 
convey different meanings. One single note, dif- 
fering from another, may convey the meaning of 
an entire sentence uttered by man. The particu- 
lar purring of a cat in one way means one thing, 
and when emitted in a slightly altered tone in- 
dicates something entirely different. Then, again, 
most animal sounds are accompanied by some dis- 
tinctive movement, as, for instance, the striking 
squeal of a hen, accompanied by the crouching at- 
titude, together indicate the appearance of a hawk 
as plainly as though it uttered the warning in 
words. It is obvious, therefore, that all the 
sounds made by animals, such as cackling, cluck- 
ing, crooning, purring, crowing, growling, and 
roaring, as well as modifications of these sounds, 
impart some meaning which can be distinguished 
by their kind, and are frequently recognized by 
others.” 

This explanation appealed to George. ‘T know 
the moment Angel is pleased, or when he is ex- 
cited, and now that I think of it, I am sure that 
he has several ways of expressing his meaning. 


208 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

and I am going to try and see whether I can tell 
the difference hereafter when he tries to talk.” 

There was little sleep that night, except on the 
part of John, who was soon asleep. When morn- 
ing broke they had an opportunity to examine the 
dead animal. It had a uniform gray color, fading 
into a white in the under part of its body, and 
with a very long, supple tail. 

^^The animal is sometimes called the panther, 
or ^painter,’ as it is familiarly known; and it is 
regarded by some authorities as the cougar. It 
inhabits the whole of America. Its home is among 
the branches of trees, and is a dangerous antag- 
onist when wounded or cornered.” 

This incident made them desirous of quitting the 
forest by the nearest route, but this was difficult 
to determine, as there were no elevated hills in 
sight. In the forenoon of the third day, other 
animals were sighted, and George, who was in 
the lead during the first part of the trip, did not 
have the courage to go ahead very far, and soon 
after the start was made, John came up and accom- 
panied him, an act entirely voluntary on his part, 
which increased the astonishment of them all. 

It is impossible to account for these remarkable 
actions of the human mind while in such a state. 
Did he realize the danger to his friends? Who 
can answer the riddle? 

But they must go on. The forest must be con- 
quered. How far they had to go was a mystery 
to them. One thing was certain : they were going 
toward West River, but they were still less than 
half way. It would have been the part of pru- 


TEIP THROUGH THE FOREST 209 


dence to have taken the route to the north, through 
a country which they had twice traversed, and 
which afforded far better traveling, but it could 
not he helped now. 

The fourth day did not improve their condition 
in the least. The dense wood was on every side. 
The inclination of the ground was so slight as to 
give no indication whether they had reached the 
summit of the tableland, or were still ascending to 
a higher level. 

In estimating the distance traveled in the four 
days it could not he possible that they were over 
fifty miles from the Cataract. To add to their 
perplexities. Jack began to walk with a perceptible 
limp. The wound in the shoulder was inflamed, 
and a rest was necessary. 

In this emergency a council was called, and the 
Professor suggested that some of the party should 
conduct an exploring expedition on foot to the 
west, going not to exceed five miles, and then re- 
turn. But as it was too near night to make the 
attempt at once, it was agreed that an early start 
should be made in the morning. 

The question now arose, who should go. 
Neither made a suggestion until Harry ventured 
this opinion : am perfectly willing to take John 

with me. I am sure he can be trusted. It will 
be imposing too much of a burden on you,” said 
he, looking at the Professor, “and I am active and 
strong enough to stand the trip.” 

This suggestion was acted on, and early in the 
morning Harry took a quantity of ammunition, 
and the Professor gave John a similar supply 


210 MYSTEEIES OP THE CAVERNS 


and a couple of tlie guns, one of which was 
strapped to his back, similar to the manner in 
which Harry was equipped. The attention of 
John was then directed to the forest in the west, 
and as Harry moved away he followed with a com- 
prehensive glance that gave all of them the great- 
est relief. Prior to their departure, the yak’s 
wound was examined, and John saw this as well, 
so that from all indications they would have no 
reason to have fears on his account. 

As usual, their bolos were taken along, and at 
intervals the trees were blazed on both sides, this 
action being performed by John with a regularity 
and precision that astonished Harry. 

Traveling under those conditions was not con- 
ducive to speed, but they were now trying to find 
what lay beyond them, and to learn, if possible, 
how much farther the dense growth existed be- 
yond them. They went on for three hours or 
more, and still no change, and they stopped to 
rest. 

Imagine yourself surrounded by these condi- 
tions. A companion who could not talk, and who 
was, in all probability, demented, the eternal 
silence, except as it would be occasionally startled 
into life by some living thing ; unable to even indi- 
cate his thoughts, or to consult with him, as to 
direction, or to talk about the probabilities beyond 
them, and you will feel that it took a brave heart 
to continue the journey. But Harry possessed 
determination. He made up his mind to go on, 
until he could find some news to take back, and so 
the quest continued for two hours more. 


TEIP THEOUGH THE FOEEST 211 


But Harry had forgotten that they started 
without food, and that it would take them as long 
to get back as they had already journeyed, and it 
was now fully noon. 

It seemed as though a hundred feet away it ap- 
peared clearer, but this delusion had been re- 
peated so often that he tired of it, and when, after 
a rest, another start was made, he mentally made 
up his mind that if he could not find a clearing 
within the next half hour they must return. 

The clearing beyond did not deceive him this 
time. He clearly saw an elevation beyond, and he 
almost shouted, but he did not stop and laugh 
in his joy at the sight. John saw it and instinct- 
ively knew its meaning. Then, motioning to him, 
he pointed back in the direction of the wagon, 
and started to retrace his steps. 

It was past noon, and Harry was hungry. John 
turned and followed and, glancing at the sun, drew 
a small package from his coat, and handed Harry 
several slices of barley bread. It affected him so 
much that he could scarcely contain himself, and 
he could not help putting his arm about him and 
indicate that his forethought and kind act was 
appreciated, and John looked at Harry inquir- 
ingly, and proceeded to eat his luncheon. 

Judging the time which had elapsed since the 
start in the morning, it would take them fully five 
hours to retrace their steps, as the glazed trees 
showed them the way readily, and they could, 
therefore, make the trip in less than six hours 
consumed up to this time, so that they would be 


212 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


back before six in the evening, but they had found 
the outlet, and determination had won. 

The passage back through the forest was made 
with a happy heart, and after they had gone two 
hours, John suddenly stopped, and grasped Harry 
by the arm as he peered forward. Harry heard 
something before them. Crackling leaves, and 
finally voices, were distinguished. They thought 
the team must be miles away. John moved for- 
ward fully fifty feet, and Harry followed. Soon 
the wagon top came in sight, and Harry bounded 
along the blazed trail, with a cry, of relief. 

Jack’s lacerated shoulder was not as bad as 
had been anticipated, and toward noon the lame- 
ness was not so perceptible, so that, in order to 
save time, it was concluded to follow the blazed 
path, which could be made out easily, thus bring- 
ing them together fully three hours earlier than 
Harry had anticipated. 

Harry explained what had been seen to the west, 
and that three or four hours more of hard travel 
would bring them to an open country which, in 
all probability, led to the West River. 

All was eagerness now, and they pressed for- 
ward, hoping to be able to reach the open coun- 
try before night set in. 


CHAPTEE XVIII 

SEEING THE FIKST SAVAGES 

George’s patience in teaching Angel was most 
commendable. Honrs were devoted to this work. 
Even before leaving home the animal would recog- 
nize certain sounds, and performed many acts at 
the word of command. Such words as “come,” 
“go,” “take this,” and others usually employed, 
were fully comprehended, and the names of Harry 
and the Professor were understood. 

Frequent tests were made by George and the 
Professor, acting in concert, as this phase of the 
education greatly interested the latter, to ascer- 
tain whether the orang performed the services 
from an understanding of the meaning of the 
words, or whether it proceeded merely from the 
constant repetitions of the words and acts con- 
jointly. 

The value of this proceeding will be made ap- 
parent to the reader as we proceed in this his- 
tory; but when they were educating Angel the 
idea of utilizing his future services, in a critical 
time, did not occur to them. 

They camped for the night at the end of the 
trail ; and now they hoped that the morrow would 
open the route over a more comfortable path than 
the last three days had offered them. Before 
going an hour on the way, a campfire was found, 
213 


214 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


which evidently had been used not many days 
before. 

There had not been any rains in their section 
of the country for ten days previous to this, and 
it was obvious that no rain had fallen on the ashes 
of this fire. From this it must be inferred that 
whoever made the fire must have been there 
recently. 

The utmost vigilance would be necessary, in 
view of this discovery. The wagon moved for- 
ward slowly. Every part of the country within 
the limits of the trail was under scrutiny, and 
every sound and moving object fully investigated 
before proceeding. This made travel necessarily 
slow. The underbrush was very thick, and but 
few trees remained, and those were scattered, 
mostly in clumps or in detached groups. 

Harry looked at the tall trees longingly many 
times, and the Professor divined his meaning. “I 
have a notion to try prospecting from one of these 
trees. We can, no doubt, see more from them 
than we can learn in a day’s travel. But trees 
of that kind are pretty hard to climb.” 

^Tt might be done with a climbing ring,” an- 
swered the Professor. 

“What is that?” 

“The cocoanut hunters and others put a hoop 
around a tree, and then get inside of the hoop, 
with the back against the hoop, so that the feet 
can get a purchase against the tree, and in that 
way the trees are scaled with the greatest agility.” 

“Well, if the savages can do it, I can.” 



‘‘With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above 
the last coiW 


[See p. 218] 







V* 

f ■■ • 







1 ' *• ' ■ « . • 

j.. V ■ fcHS'Wr '■-.f'":,,, .V- ^ ■■ . .^n-'. V 

b^C'-V " *#&■''-■■•■“:'• f"* - ’-J Vi ' ■ ‘^ ‘♦i-'-S '‘J%r 


i ^T’: 


i 





I, 




■( 


V- 






' ' / 


. '»• 


* 






'■^m' 





»i . ♦ 


• <r 


if 



Nv 





. . f« 

<f ^ ’jt ‘*C 




'- • -Tw '-u ' 

» 'i , 1 , 


Pi 


' o'* ' 

.<T, 7^y-,'„- : , 

• ■ -■ ' . / •' 


\f -4: 



1 ’dr *•' 

•t ♦'« Tl*- I 


.rt?v.' aiv,' 


?■ 


< . > 




V Hj 

V’<« ''(*:» ^ 

tlr’-'fi^ipr'-..- ■’fc.'-'- 





ibA-r''. ^r \:r '■ .\ 




i O 


’■%'* I ‘ , .v,-< 

i" 

» pM 


r4f 

i.lT' •*■ *. 








•V 


.W’ C« 1 - 






. « 


.t. 


ii'I ■*^<- V? :i':-. . 

'''•*! ■ ;; 

^ ■> '-;o"'- ‘ 

^ •_f inV/jai-'g" 




6 . . 


*41 


A 





JIf- 




• t - 

^ u . ; 


■'Ai 


- -i f 






\ ■■ 

..e • ^ 

• 

« 

* 

♦ 

T • V ^ * 1 

» * 

^ F 1 

ft • 


*1-1 

• 



'i** 










SEEING FIEST SAVAGES 


215 


might he well to make the trial, as even thirty 
or forty feet would give a fair view of the coun- 
try. Before making the hoop we should select a 
tree most suitable for observation.” 

An oak tree with a bare trunk up to the first 
large limb was finally selected. The diameter was 
fully two feet at the base. 

“With a tree of this size the hoop should be 
about three and a half feet in diameter.” 

“What material shall we make it out off’ 

“If we can find a small hickory sapling it will 
be the most serviceable, because its natural 
strength and stiffness will permit us to use a 
small and light pole.” 

A search was made, and after a time several 
were cut and brought to the tree. The thick end 
of the sapling was cut or pared off along one side 
so it would bend in the direction of the slice, and 
this was put about the tree and the ends brought 
together and lapped. Thongs were then used to 
splice the lapped ends, and small nails driven in 
at intervals to assure security. 

The use of hoops of this kind requires practice, 
and the natives use their bare feet against the 
tree, which prevents slipping. Harry, however, 
had shoes; not a very good thing to use against 
the bark, and after numerous trials both boys 
found the task a trying one. Their bare feet were 
too tender to use against the rough bark, and as a 
last resort one of the old pair of shoes was brought 
out, and studded with nails. 

The climber gets inside the hoop, with the lat- 


216 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 

ter around the tree, and resting against the small 
of the back, or a little higher np. The feet are 
then braced against the tree, and the hoop grasped 
by both hands. In climbing ther body is suddenly 
moved toward the tree, and this motion tempora- 
rily releases the outward pressure against the 
hoop, and at the same moment the hoop is moved 
upwardly about a foot. One or both feet then 
make an upward step, and this process is repeated. 

More than an hour was occupied in learning to 
manipulate the hoop, so as to progress upwardly, 
and at the end of that time Harry made a slow 
and careful ascent to the first limb, a distance of 
thirty feet, stopping at intervals, as he made his 
way up, to view the ever-increasing landscape, 
and to take the needed rest. 

“Do you see anything, Harry was George’s 
eager questioning, as he moved upwardly. 

“Nothing yet,” was the invariable reply. When 
the first limb was reached he seated himself, and 
had an opportunity to view the surroundings from 
a far better vantage point. 

“Can you see the river!” was the Professor’s 
inquiry. 

“It is too hazy to make out anything there. It 
is clearer to the south.” 

“What can you see to the southwest!” 

Harry scanned the country in that direction for 
some time before replying. “All I can see there 
are trees, trees, just like the forest we have been 
going through; but directly west of us we would 
have comparatively easy traveling. The forest 


SEEING FIEST SAVAGES 


217 


seems to extend southwest, and we have been trav- 
eling through it at an angle. If I could get higher 
I might have a better view.^’ 

He ascended fifteen feet higher, but even at that 
point the forest hid the view to the southwest. 

‘Trom your examination I judge our only hope 
is to reach the river and travel down its banks 

“Yes; because we don^t want any more of the 
forest with the team.” 

“Before we go, let us take off the hoop ; I want 
to use it again.” And Harry unwrapped the 
thongs and disengaged it from the tree. 

After luncheon the marching was resumed, this 
time due west to the river. The trip during the 
day told on Jack, and a halt was called before 
they had gone five miles. Harry and John took 
their guns and started south on a tour of investi- 
gation, making their way toward a slight eleva- 
tion which he had noticed from the observation 
point. 

It was really a hill, covered with trees, and gave 
the appearance, from the tree top, as being a con- 
tinuation of the forest range. This was good news 
to carry back. While passing through the tallest 
of the trees, Harr}", who was ahead, felt himself 
suddenly grasped, and he uttered a scream. 

John rushed forward just as Harry saw the 
repulsive form of a huge snake which had wound 
itself around him. Harry was absolutely helpless 
in the folds of the serpent. John’s quick eye took 
in the situation at once, and by the time he reached 
Harry the bolo was in his hand and poised. With 


218 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


a single stroke the body of the snake was severed 
above the last coil, and the portion suspended 
from the tree fell alongside of the combatants, 
and John’s hands reached out to assist Harry. 

Harry was frightened so that he could hardly 
utter a word, and after some exertion he disen- 
tangled himself and gazed on the immense ser- 
pent. When he. had recovered partially he was 
too much excited to proceed, and they returned 
to the camp with a story of the attack and the 
noble rescue on the part of J ohn. 

George’s excitement was at fever heat. “We 
must get his skin.” Harry was willing, because 
a trophy of that kind was worth preserving. The 
team was taken along, as it was fully a half mile 
from the camp. When the Professor saw the ser- 
pent he congratulated Harry on his escape, who, 
but for the fortunate presence of John, would 
have been killed. 

It measured twenty-two feet in length and its 
greatest diameter was eight inches. 

“What is this — the boa constrictor!” 

“It belongs to the same family, but is known as 
the anaconda.” 

“What is the difference between the boa con- 
strictor and the python!” 

“The boas are the species found in the western 
hemisphere, whereas the pythons inhabit the east- 
ern countries. The anaconda is a native of Bra- 
zil and some of the other South American coun- 
tries. They are non-poisonous, and depend for 
securing prey on their wonderful swiftness and in 


SEEING FIEST SAVAGES 219 

the tremendous power which they exert when the 
victims are in their grasp.” 

As usual, George had been prospecting also, 
and when the skin had been removed and the ex- 
citement died away, he exhibited a peculiar fruit. 
It was the shape and size of a pear, but had a 
peculiar kidney-shaped pendant at its large end. 





The Professor smiled when he saw it. “You 
have- the fruit of the Anacardium, or cashew tree. 
That is, it is a combined fruit and nut.” 

“Is this little projecting part a nut?” 

“Yes ; and this evening we can try some of them; 
but they must be roasted. The fruit can be eaten, 
as if is, but it is like the persimmon; it must be 
fully ripe, or it will be too astringent. It is a fine 
medicine, and the sap of the tree produces a prod- 
uct like gum arabic, and is known in commerce as 
acajou.” 

The elevation which Harry was anxious to gain 


220 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVEENS 


was before them, less than a mile, and a^ 'it was- 
not more than four in the afternoon, the^ team 
was driven forward and the slight ascent begun. 
In a half hour the summit was reached. It was 
not at a great elevation, but the incline was a 
gradual one, and it was hoped that from the ele- 
vated portion a better glimpse could be obtained 
than the tree afforded. 

It was too late when they reached the camping 
place to attempt any observations that night, but 
in the morning an investigation was made to find 
a tree of sufficient size to afford a good view. 
When it was finally found the hoop was again 
brought out and Harry slowly made his way up- 
wardly, and those below waited in suspense for 
news. 

He made a deliberate survey, and called down : 
'T can see the West Eiver, and directly to the 
southwest are white objects, but so far away that 
I cannot tell what they are. They may be tents 
or huts, or something of that kind. I couldn’t say 
positively.” 

^^Do the objects appear to be at or near the 
river f’ asked the Professor. 

‘Tt is difficult to say whether the river goes in 
that direction. I can see glimpses of the stream 
only here and there.” 

‘^Do you see any mountains to the south?” 

“None whatever. Everything merges into a 
haze beyond the white objects I referred to.” 

“It* is probable,” said the Professor, “we have 
located them, as I find, from an examination of 


SEEING FIEST SAVAGES 221 

the sailing chart, that the village is located at 
about that point. I think our course should now 
be directed to the river, as traveling will be better 
near its shores, and we would, I think, be more 
likely to meet some of the inhabitants along the 
shore than in the dense interior.” 

The low mountain range beyond the West Kiver 
was plainly visible from the elevation. The Pro- 
fessor noted how its lower end sloped down, and 
he knew their location beyond question, and ex- 
plained that they were now practically due east 
of the point where they were compelled, on the 
tempestuous night, to turn back to the north. 

It was a long, weary night for them, because 
expectation ran high. They were anxious, and 
yet dreaded the meeting, but they had sought it 
and could not go back now. No fires were kindled 
that night, although George had counted on some 
of the roast nuts. It would not be safe to hazard 
a light. 

The utmost vigilance was now to be the watch- 
word. There must be no firing of guns or wan- 
dering from the camp on the part of either. At 
the time the wagon was constructed the Professor 
had an eye to its use as a means of defense, which 
was explained to the boys, and this offered a 
great sense of security to them. 

The sides had been made hip’h with this end in 
view, and not for the purpose of hauling big loads'. 
If attacked in the open, it would serve as a fort, 
and would enable them to move around from one 
side, or end, to the other without being exposed. 
In anticipation all the guns were examined and 


222 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


the ammunition placed within reach and con- 
veniently arranged for any emergency. 

The provisions were also arranged to prepare 
for a siege if necessary. During that evening the 
Professor for the first time explained in detail 
how the natives would be approached. 

think it is well, now that we are about to 
come in contact with the people here, to be pre- 
pared to meet them in the proper way, so as to 
insure safety to ourselves. It is likely that we 
shall have to treat with the natives, and thus come 
to some understanding, before we entrust our- 
selves to their mercy. Above all things, we want 
to impress on them the feeling that we are not 
antagonistic and have no hostile intentions. We 
are unfortunate in not knowing the character of 
the dwellers on the island. They may have had 
frequent contact with the outside world. That 
may, or it may not, mitigate our lot. So we can- 
not count on that factor too much. If they are 
low down in the scale of humanity, we may find 
a still harder problem. In any event, however, 
this must be made plain. The wagon is our fort. 
From that we can defy them, unless they have 
firearms. 

‘‘From this time on let us keep together ” 

Something unusual stirred beyond. The crack- 
ling of twigs was plainly recognized, and the 
mumbling sound of voices could be made out. 
They were human voices, but their intonations, as 
they came nearer, were sufficient to show that the 
language was not that of civilized people. They 


SEEING FIRST SAVAGES 223 

were more in tlie nature of successive grunts, not 
much more definable than the noises of animals. 

They were wrought up to the highest tension, 
and the only fear was that either Angel or the 
yaks would make some noise which might attract 
the passers-by. To their great relief the sounds 
died away. This visit would have been welcomed 
during the daytime, but at night they could not 
afford to take any risks. 

This incident showed they were now in an 
enemy's country. The river was fully ten miles 
to the west of them. How far the encampment 
or village of the inhabitants was to the south they 
could only imperfectly estimate, but it was cer- 
tainly twenty miles or more. 

What they longed for at this stage more than 
anything else was the open country. The proxim- 
ity of the river would likely be the better place 
for them, so early the next morning the team was 
gotten ready, and before starting, the Professor 
made a survey of the surroundings in the direc- 
tion that their visitors had gone. 

At several places were indications of tracks, 
and these were followed, the team coming along 
behind. Everything was covered with leaves 
where the trees abounded, and in the more open 
areas the grass was so well advanced that it was 
difficult to distinguish tracks in the earth, but the 
broken-down grass plainly showed their trail, lead- 
ing to the south. 

Aside from that, nothing could be gathered to 
give any indications until they had proceeded over 


224 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


a mile, when a small rivulet, the first they had 
noticed since leaving West River, crossed their 
route. The Professor actually bounded forward 
at the sight and examined the footprints. The 
marks of bare feet were visible where they crossed, 
and they were of abnormal size. 

After a careful examination, the Professor said : 
“There must have been at least a half dozen of 
them, judging by the different prints. See, this 
one has a deformed foot, or the big toe is missing; 
and this one must be a large man, judging from 
the deep impression made.’’ Beyond the vicinity 
of the stream all footprints were again lost. 

“As we are now likely to have an open country 
until we reach the river, we can make more ex- 
tended observations from the top of the wagon, 
and one should be there constantly to notice any 
signs on either side.” 

They were within five miles of the river, and 
George, who occupied the post of lookout on the 
top bow of the wagon, called out excitedly: “I 
can see them; there must be a dozen or more.” 
The wagon stopped, and the Professor and Harry 
hurriedly scrambled to the top. John saw the 
movement and seemed to understand, for he also 
crawled up and looked across the rolling land- 
scape to the southwest. 

In the distance were unmistakable movements 
of beings moving to and fro. They were distant 
at least two miles, and there was no evidence, 
from the character of their movements, that any- 
thing unusual had occurred, and it might there- 


SEEING FIEST SAVAGES 225 

fore be inferred that the wagon had not yet been 
discovered. 

At last they had come up to the people who 
occupied such a large share of their speculations 
during the past year, and in ‘^The Tribesmen^^ 
are set forth the meeting of the savages and the 
hostile manner in which they were received, to- 
gether with some of the things which really show 
why the land they lived in might justly be called 
‘‘Wonder Island.” 


THE END 



GLOSSARY OF WORDS 

USED IN THE TEXT 


Alloy. 

Actinic. 

Acutely. 

AUied. 

Alienation. 

Amplitude. 

Antiquated. 

Animation. 

Antagonistic. 

Agility. 

Assumption. 

Bacteria. 

Betokened. 

Bestowed. 

Buccaneer. 

Bullion. 

Calcareous. 

Cardinal. 

Caulking. 

Cavities. 

Carbonate. 

Calcium. 

Canopied. 

Centrifugal. 


A combination of two or more metals. 

Photographic rays. Those vibrations above the vibra- 
tions which produce violet. 

To the point. Being keen. 

Attached to; bound to; an arrangement with. 

To cause to turn away ; to make indifferent. 

Scope; reach; breadth; fullness. 

Adapted to the uses or customs of olden times. 
Possessing animal life; sparkling; lively. 

Against; opposed. 

Quick; sprightly. 

Taking it for granted. 

A microscopic microbe, very minute, widely distrib- 
uted in all matter. 

To give promise or evidence of; presage; indicate. 
To confer as a gift ; to give freely as a gift. 

A pirate or freebooter. 

Gold or silver in mass, usually in convenient bar. 
Impregnated with lime, or largely composed of it. 

Of prime or special importance. 

The process of filling the seams of vessels. 

Holes; depressed portions. 

To impregnate or charge with carbonic acid. 

Lime. 

A covering. Usually a conical top. 

Directed or tending away from the center. 

227 


228 MYSTERIES OP THE CAVERNS 


Chsfracterize. 

Consistently. 

Convolute. 

Coefficient. 

Constant. 

Convex. 

Conducive. 

Contingency. 

Compounding. 

Contracted. 

Combustion. 

Contemplated. 

Caucasian. 

Consistency. 

Clarified. 

Crucial. 

Cylindrical. 

Decoration. 

Debris. 

Defect. 

Density. 

Delver. 

Demeanor. 

Domesticated. 

Delusion. 

Dilapidated. 

Discrimination. 

Deranged. 

Deportment. 

Dextrous. 

Designations. 


To delineate or set forth in a particular way. 
Standing together or in agreement. 

Rolled one part on another or inward from one side. 
A number or letter put before an algebraic expres- 
sion, to show that one is to be divided by the other. 
That which is permanent or invariable. 

Bulging outwardly; raised. 

Helping; tending toward. 

The awaiting of an event ; in the event of. 

Made up of two or more substances. 

Made smaller; reduced in size. 

Being consumed. Disintegration. 

To consider thoughtfully; to look at attentively. 

Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of the white race 
of mankind. 

Harmonious; not contradictory. 

Made clear; not turbid or cloudy. 

Decisive as between views or theories. Testing. 

A barrel-shaped body. 

To adorn with something ornamental. 

Accumulation of material. 

Something short; not perfect. 

Closeness of parts. 

One who searches into things. 

Appearance; manner; action. 

To bring under the control of man. 

The state of being deceived or led astray. 

Torn up; fallen into decay; gone to ruin. 

Ability to select; to judge; to be able to pick out. 

A disordered mind. 

Manner of acting. 

Skilful ; quick ; adroit. 

A distinctive mark or appellation. 


GLOSSAEY 


229 


Depressed. 

Determination. 

Decomposition. 

Dimensions. 

Dilemma. 

Duplicated. 

Duct. 

Ductility. 

Effective. 

Emergency. 

Emaciated. 

Entranced. 

Ensue. 

Enraptured. 

Entablature. 

Episode. 

Essential. 

Estuary. 

Exhilaration. 

Extracted. 

Facial. 

Facility. 

^ Fascination. 

Fathom. 

! Fermentation. 

Feasible. 

Fiber. 


Lowered; made unhappy or unspirited. 

Insistence; firmness; fixed purpose. 

The act or process of separating anything. 

The measurements; sizes. 

A perplexing case to decide. 

Made in a similar manner. 

An opening, hole, or conveyor. 

Capable of being drawn out. 

Fit for a destined purpose; a striking impression. 

An unexpected happening calling for immediate 
action. 

Greatly reduced in flesh. 

To put into a state of ecstacy. 

That which follows; to go after. 

Overpowered with emotion. 

The uppermost member held in place by columns. 
A particular occurrence. 

The particular thing; the important element. 

The portion at the mouth of a river where it dis- 
charges into another body of water. 

Lively, pleasing or enlivening sensation. 

To take from. Taken out of. 

Pertaining to the face. 

Doing with ease. 

A resistible influence. A pleasing impulse. 

To find out; depth; penetration. 

A chemical condition where germs are developed and 
grow in a substance and change the elements com- 
prising it. 

Easy to accomplish; that which is practical. 

A structure composed of filaments, like a vegetable 
stalk. 

The manner in which articles or substances are 
built up. 


Formation. 


230 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Fracture. 

Fraternity. 

Fusing. 

Fumigating. 

Fulcrum. 

Granulating. 

Grotto. 

Gruesome. 

Gunwale. 

HorLsontal. 

Hypnotized. 

Impervious. 

Immoderately. 

Instructively. 

Intonation. 

Inactive. 

Intestines. 

Intimation. 

Intruder. 

Inscription. 

Inevitable. 

Insulated. i 

Interim. 

Incidence. 

Interpret. 

Ingenuity. 

Inordinately. 

Indicate. 

Intensity. 

Inverted. 

Insistent. 


A break or crack. 

A body of persons held together by some common tie. 
To melt by heat. 

To treat by means of gases. 

The support against which a lever rests. 

To form into small grains or particles. 

A small cavern or cavern-like apartment. 

Suggesting gloomy or frightful thoughts. 

The upper portion of the hull of a ship or boat. 

At right angles to a line directed to the center of 
the earth. 

A treatment which acts directly on the mind or 
nervous system. 

Permitting no passage through or into. 

More than the usual; more than the ordinary. 

Along educational lines; learning things. 

The modulation of the voice. 

Not vigorous. 

That part of the digestive tube below the stomach. 

A hint. 

To enter or appear when not wanted. 

A writing; an announcement. 

Anything which is bound to happen. A result. 
Shielded from something. 

In the meantime. Within certain periods. 
Happening at the same time. A circumstance. 

To make plain. To bring to an understanding. 

To devise; to bring forward out of the ordinary. 
More than the ordinary course or manner. 

To show, or to point out. 

With full vigor; strong; vivacious. 

Upside down. Turned about. 

To continue urging; determination. 


GLOSSARY 


231 


Involuntary. 

Inefficient. 

Jubilant. 

Laboriously. 

Lacerated. 

Lee. 

Malady. 

Manipulate. 

Manifestation. 

Maneuvered. 

Maritime. 

Mercury. 

Minimizing. 

Misgiving. 

Miniature. 

Momentum. 

MobDity. 

Monopoly. 

Nitrogenous. 

Normal. 

Obliquely. 

Octagonal. 

Orbit. 

Orifice. 

Orgy. 

Ozone. 

Pandemonium. 

Paleontologist. 


Without intent; in spite of all precaution. 

Not careful or prudent; without full capacity. 
Joyous. 

Consistently carrying out work without regard ta 
the amount of labor required. 

To injure or to tear the flesh. 

The side or direction opposite to that from which 
the wind comes. 

Sickness. Particular kind of illness. 

The manner of handling. To artfully influence the 
result. 

Made known; acknowledged; understood. 

To make methodical change of position. 

Pertaining to the sea, or to naval affairs. 

A silver-white metallic metal in a liquid state. 

The smallest state. In the least difficult position. 

A feeling of doubt or apprehension. 

Small; a little copy. 

The power of overcoming resistance possessed by a. 
body. 

The capacity to change or alter. 

Possessed of complete power. Full sway. 

Partaking of the qualities of nitrogen. 

A perpendicular; according to an established law or 
principle. 

A deviation from the direct line. 

Eight-sided. 

The course in which a planet travels. 

A hole; an opening. 

Wild or wanton revelry. 

An allotropic condition of oxygen. A substance made 
from oxygen. 

A fiendish or riotous uproar. 

A student in the origin of life on the globe. 


232 MYSTEEIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Patriarch. 

Pathetically. 

Parallel. 

Paralyzed. 

Penetrate. 

Perforation. 

Periodical. 

Peaty. 

Personified. 

Perturbed. 

Perceptible. 

Phenomena. 

Primitive. 

Prospecting. 

Profusion. 

Port. 

Proportionally. 

Predominating. 

Properties. 

Propagate. 

Prognosticate. 

Promulgate. 

Privation. 

Promontory. 

Progenitor. 

Proximity. 

Padiating. 

Relaxation. 

Retarding. 

Reticent. 


The elder ; the one in a tribe on whom authority vests. 
In a vein of sadness; arousing tender emotions. 

On a line with; side by side the same distance. 

Loss of power to control the muscles or other parts 
of the body. 

To go into. 

To make an opening or hole. 

At regular intervals. 

Having the characteristics of peat. 

To transform from a thought or speech into a person. 
To be disturbed in mind. 

Noticeable; seen. 

Something directly observable; anything visible. 

The first way of doing things; the original plan or 
method. 

Investigating; trying to discover new elements or 
substances. 

Many; an abundance. 

A haven. The left side of a vessel. 

Relative magnitude, number or degree. 
Overshadowing; possessing power. 

The elementary substances of any material. 

To bring to a better condition or state. Making an 
improved breed or type of animals or plants. 

To foretell. 

To announce; to give out. 

Hardship. To be kept from the necessaries of life. 
A high point of land extending out into the sea. 

An ancestor in the direct line. 

Close to-; in the neighborhood of. 

To emit or send out rays. 

A change from the ordinary routine. 

Holding back; making the object go slower. 
Habitually keeping quiet or in reserve. 


GLOSSARY 


233 


Regulation. 

Refraction. 

Reverse. 

Rifling. 

Rotation. 

Seepage. 

Sequence. 

Secluded. 

Spherical. 

Spiral. 

Spawning. 

Stringers. 

Standard. 

Strata. 

Strenuous. 

Suppressing. 

Substitute. 

Sulphide. 

Subsided. 

Symptoms. 

Synthesis. 

Theorist. 

Timbre. 

Tortuous. 

Tourmaline. 

Traverse. 

Triangulation. 


In accordance with some law or order established. 
That property in light which causes a bend as the 
ray passes from one substance through another. 

In the opposite direction. 

Spiral grooves in the bore of a gun. 

Turning; moving around a common center. 

Leaking; passing through. 

That which follows as the result of a certain thing. 
Kept hidden; not exposed. 

Round like a globe. 

Having the twist of a corkscrew. 

The period when fish lay their eggs. 

The longitudinal pieces which form the main frame 
of a structure. 

A post. Also the flag or ensign of a country. 

Parts of layers of earth, rock, or other material. 
Vigorous; insistent. 

Trying to keep out of sight; hidden. 

In place of. 

A compound of sulphur with another element. 

To stop; to proceed no further. 

Indications; showing effects of certain illness or 
treatment. 

The putting of different things together. 

One who speculates; one who tries to arrange facts 
to harmonize. 

The peculiarity of a sound whereby it is distim 
guished from another. 

Moving in a winding or irregular w’^ay. 

One of the gems, found in various colors. 

Across; traveling; to go over. 

The method of surveying whereby two known points 
are used to find a third, by means of the angles 
made. 


234 MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS 


Utilitarian. 

Untenable. 
Vacuum. 
Veered. 
Veritable. 
Vibration. - 

Vividly. 

Wrencb. 


One who tries to take advantage of any knowledge and 
make use of it. 

Without good ground. 

A space entirely devoid of matter. 

Turned aside or in a different direction. 

Truthful ; well known to be correct. 

Any movement which is more or less irregular and 
continuous. 

Distinctly seen; brightly appearing. 

To twist violently. To injure by a forcible turn or 
movement. 



















THE “HOW-TO-DO-IT” BOOKS 


Carpentry for Boys 

A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner 
all subjects pertaining to the ** King of Trades showing the care 
and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; 
the principles involved in the building of various kinds of struc- 
tures, and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two 
hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and 
includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the 
art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever pub- 
lished for boys. 


Electricity for Boys 

The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the funda- 
mental principles in each phase of the science, and practically 
applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the 
knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various 
phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within 
the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and 
is illustrated with two hundred original drawings. 


Practical Mechanics for Boys 

This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of 
practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure 
and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized 
to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work 
is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building 
explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of 
cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in 
explaining subjects. Fully illustrated. 


Price 60 cents per volume 


THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 

147 Fourth Avenue New York 


The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts 

A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS 

Which, in addition to the interesting boy scout stories by CAPTAIN ALAN 
DOUGLAS, Scoutmaster, contain articles on nature lore, native animals 
amd a fund of other information pertaining to out-of-door life, 
that will appeal to the boy’s love of the open 


I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol 

Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use 
their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad 
from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp 
life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read. 

II. Woodcraft; or. How a Patrol Leader Made Good 

This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the hoys are called 
upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with 
healthful excitement. 

III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot 

Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit 
of our young friends. A var'ety of incidents follow fast, one after the other. 

IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield 

They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the 
final game w-ith the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a 
stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years. 

V. Great Hike; or. The Pride of The Khaki Trocp 

After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking. 
Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the 
different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations. 

VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day 

Few stories “get” us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent 
failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most 
ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written. 

Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge 
Boy Scout Series 

Wild Animals of the United States — Tracking — in Number I. 

Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States in Number II. 

Reptiles of the United States in Number III. 

Fishes of the United States in Number IV. 

Insects of the Uhited States in Number V. 

Birds of the United States in Number VI. 


Cloth Binding Cover Illustrations in Four Colors 40c. Per Volume 


THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 

147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK 


THE 

Campfire and Trail Series 


1 . In Camp on the Big Sunflower. 

2. The Rivals of the Trail. 

3. The Strcinge Cabin on Catamount Island. 

4. Lost in the Great Dismal Swamp. 

5. With Trapper Jim in the North Woods. 

6. Caught in a Forest Fire. 

By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE 


A series of wholesome stories for boys told 
in an interesting way and appealing to their 
love of the open. 


Each, l2mo. Cloth. 40 cents per volume 


THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 
147 FOURTH AVENUE 
NEW YORK 


Christy Mathewson’s Book 



A Ripping Good 
Baseball Story 
by One Who 
Knows the Game 


This book has attained a 
larger s£ile than any baseball 
story ever published. 

The narrative deals with the 
students of a large university 
and their baseball team, the members of which 
have names which enable the reader to recognize them 
as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day before 
their entrance into the major leagues. 


One gains a very clear idea of “inside baseball** 
stripped of wearisome technicalities. The book is pro- 
fusely illustrated throughout and contains also a number 
of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson 
throws his deceptive curves, together with brief descrip- 
tion of each. 


Cloth hound 5}/i X 7^ ^rice 50c. per volume 


THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY 


147 FOURTH AVENUE 


NEW YORK 




i 


t 



tv. 




A ' 


>• * 




,, ,/'. 't v; '.^ ■' ., 'u ■'■'■ ■■''■'''■• ’ '' ■ 'M '■■''■ 


« • 


* 


I 


f , 


.if 


■: ■'. ■ • 'Ji-i 

I . ' . d i . 


* 


' 'V >vi’ 


■ J * 


►- - •!> r’V - 

H •* •I**' ^ 1 


• :j : / 


j > 





. V 






*' 


: • 

I 


• • 


->, v' ' ' 

j J*-!.'’' '»'■•/ ‘4 *>•/•' 1 .* I ‘ 

\ W 'v-z: 

^ i s ' • . r . ‘ 1 a' * ' 


i 4 


* 0 


.4kS* V 


nih 


■/•I''’ 


f 


A 

L 





• ^ (f •? i , .f'-'... •;> • 

.'■-. ' ‘ ' ' 'j^ ■ *'* ; -f 'J 


:i.' 


'■■(i 


■■ ■■ ■''' ■ k'aW 

:i •: • ‘ W™: 


' ^ V V 

% '•* 

= ‘w • 

/>r T v;.’T : • • ■;. . 

^ « i • • • 


« 






• ► 


1 


•I * 


■•'s' 


lniH|C' r»'\" 

>A-'^ 5 .'. 


4 J' 


I 


i 


i ’ *•' 

' *V.. >,-., ■ 


■ . I 
> . ' 


Ml - . 

‘■'•vs ' ■vfflK'al 


i , 
» • 


I • 


i > 


« • 


l.K 




' V 

I -'X • 






r .« 




4 


1 


* J 


. * t 

4 4 


< 


I 

•« ■ •?.« 


^ /* . . 

# ■ V 




\ 




• # 

. i ^ 


<• . ' 


l^ 


4 - * 

4 


‘ * >i 


/ 


WmMM, 

.'-f 


. / 


I 


J. 


I t ^ 




, ; ^ d 


« ' 

> * 


k ' • 


r f* 


\ ■ • 


\ 


f I 


: 

b I • 


m 



r^fii • 


< i . 

^ * 


I « 


S (J 


I 




» • 


1 '.^ ■; 
‘ -i V 

K • 


I 

^ 1 




' ‘I 


kTi 


y-’: : ( . • • 


>• 4 


•>♦. 


»* * 


f 

t 

0 

P 


% U 






•• i I 


i< 

I 

» ' 


i 


jI 


( 

• L 


» > • 


^ r *• 

k • 


V*- 


V 

<N,’ 

I ‘ • 


I . • 

^ • 
► k • 


.'.•V> 

. 4 
0 


• • "• • .J 

•• \i * >/ . 

/ k 



4 . • 

•* . Ik . » 


■'Zi 

,1 r'^ 


I • 


' V 

: 1 • '.‘. 


t.' •'• 


» .‘KM'. \*jOW“ • iSj 

> *4* . J t.,1 slaSfl<«/ yfmp^Kjim 

<-/ T .>r«t*A^rXpV ||fignvAd^ 


t t 


4 I 


1 


i ^ 


i . 




» • * 




. *••• 


V ' • 

• >•4 


• y. "V' 

) % > 






jTJ 









i . 


* 9 




4 • • 

.t ■ 




» ) 

*• \ . 


)( 


* 4 


^ . ** 


4 • 


4 • 


i.y‘ 


f • 


j>' ; 

Itf. 4 t, 


I H 
s» 

k . 


t ' i « I i 





•« ‘ 




,{ 


I 





I 








> 


4 

% 


I 


£3 


» 


\ 


s 



4 









A 


♦ 



* I 





4 f 


4 C 



• r . 



« I 


4 




r 





4 , 

a 1 


f 


• .«5 


‘ 'yh 


-.JM 



♦ 4 


• • ♦ 



< 


# 


• i 




• •• 

I 

A 


« 



I 





i 





/ 



